Apache OpenOffice Wiki - User contributions [en]

Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1 User Guide Chapters

2026-07-26T11:26:44Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:{{AOo}} 4.1 User Guides (PDF)}}

The {{AOo}} 4.1 guides are presented in chapters for easy use.



Editable files (.odt) are available from [https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT this page].
---- 


{|style="border: 0px solid #666;" cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center

|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Getting Started Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS.pdf|Full Book]] - 2026-07-14 — (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS1.pdf|Preface]] - 2023-05-04 — May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS2.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS3.pdf|Chapter 2   - Styles and Templates]] — 2023-05-04 - (Apr 27)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS4.pdf|Chapter 3   - Getting Started with Writer]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS5.pdf|Chapter 4   - Getting Started with Calc]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS6.pdf|Chapter 5   - Getting Started with Impress]]— 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS7.pdf|Chapter 6   - Getting Started with Draw]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS8.pdf|Chapter 7   - Getting Started with Base]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS9.pdf|Chapter 8   - Getting Started with Math]] — 2023-05-05 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS10.pdf|Chapter 9   - Printing, Exporting, and E-mailing]] — 2023-04-27 - (Apr 27)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS11.pdf|Chapter 10 - Graphics, the Gallery, and Fontworks]] — 2022-12-30 - (Dec 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS12.pdf|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2022-12-30 - (Dec 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS13.pdf|Chapter 12 - Getting Started with Macros]] — 2026-07-14 - (Jul 14)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Writer Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-06-17 (Jun 17)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG1-IntroducingWriter.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Writer]] — 2023-07-31 (Jul 31)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG2-SettingUpWriter.pdf|Chapter 2   - Setting Up Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG3-WorkingWithText.pdf|Chapter 3   - Working with Text]] — 2023-11-10 (Nov 10)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG4-FormattingPages.pdf|Chapter 4   - Formatting Pages]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG5-PrintingExportingEmailing.pdf|Chapter 5   - Printing, Exporting, Emailing]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG6-IntroductionToStyles.pdf|Chapter 6   - Introduction to Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG7-WorkingWithStyles.pdf|Chapter 7   - Working with Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG8-WorkingWithGraphics.pdf|Chapter 8   - Working with Graphics]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG9-WorkingWithTables.pdf|Chapter 9   - Working with Tables]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG10-WorkingWithTemplatesInWriter.pdf|Chapter 10 - Working with Templates in Writer]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG11-UsingMailMerge.pdf|Chapter 11 - Using Mail Merge]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG12-TOCsIndexesBiblios.pdf|Chapter 12 - Tables of Contents, Indexes, and Bibliographies]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG13-WorkingWithMasterDocument.pdf|Chapter 13 - Working with Master Documents]] — 2025-07-07 (Jul 7)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG14-WorkingWithFields.pdf|Chapter 14 - Working with Fields]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG15-UsingFormsInWriter.pdf|Chapter 15 - Using Forms in Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG16-CustomizingWriter.pdf|Chapter 16 - Customizing Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Math Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41MG01.pdf|Math Guide]] — 2026-03-16 (March 16)


|width="45%" style="border-right: 1px dotted #999;border-left: 1px dotted #999; "|


<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Calc Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG01-IntroducingCalc.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG02-EnterEditFormatData.pdf|Chapter 2   - Enter Edit Format Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG03-ChartsAndGraphs.pdf|Chapter 3   - Charts And Graphs]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG04-StylesAndTemplates.pdf|Chapter 4   - Styles And Templates]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG05-UsingGraphicsInCalc.pdf|Chapter 5   - Using Graphics In Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG06-PrintingExportingEmailing.pdf|Chapter 6   - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG07-FormulasAndFunctions.pdf|Chapter 7   - Formulas And Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG08-PivotTable.pdf|Chapter 8   - Pivot Table]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG09-DataAnalysis.pdf|Chapter 9   - Data Analysis]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG10-LinkingCalcData.pdf|Chapter 10 - Linking Calc Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG11-SharingAndReviewing.pdf|Chapter 11 - Sharing And Reviewing]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG12-CalcMacro.pdf|Chapter 12 - Calc Macro]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG13-CalcAsASimpleDatabase.pdf|Chapter 13 - Calc As A Simple Database]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG14-CustomizingCalc.pdf|Chapter 14 - Customizing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG15-KeyboardShortcuts.pdf|Chapter 15 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG16-CalcFunctions.pdf|Chapter 16 - Calc Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG17-CalcErrorCodes.pdf|Chapter 17 - Calc Error Codes]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Draw Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG01-IntroducingDraw.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Draw]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG02-DrawingBasicShapes.pdf|Chapter 2   - Drawing Basic Shapes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG03-WorkingWithObjects.pdf|Chapter 3   - Working with Objects and Object Points]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG04-ChangingObjectAttributes.pdf|Chapter 4   - Changing Object Attributes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG05-CombiningMultipleObjects.pdf|Chapter 5   - Combining Multiple Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG06-EditingPictures.pdf|Chapter 6   - Editing Pictures (Raster Graphics)]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG07-3DObjects.pdf|Chapter 7   - Working with 3D Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG08-TipsAndTricks.pdf|Chapter 8   - Tips and Tricks]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG09-FlowDiagramsOrgCharts.pdf|Chapter 9   - Organization Charts, Flow Diagrams, and More]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG10-AdvancedDrawTechniques.pdf|Chapter 10 - Advanced Draw Techniques]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Impress Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG01-IntroducingImpress.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG02-SlideMastersStylesTemplates.pdf|Chapter 2   - Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG03-AddFormatText.pdf|Chapter 3   - Adding And Formatting Text]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG04-AddFormatPictures.pdf|Chapter 4   - Adding And Formatting Pictures]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG05-ManageGraphicObjects.pdf|Chapter 5   - Managing Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG06-FormatGraphicObjects.pdf|Chapter 6   - Formatting Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG07-SpreadsheetsChartsObjects.pdf|Chapter 7   - Including Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG08-SlidesNotesHandouts.pdf|Chapter 8   - Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, and Handouts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG09-SlideShows.pdf|Chapter 9   - SlideShows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG10-PrintEmailExportSave.pdf|Chapter 10 - Printing, e-mailing, exporting and saving slideshows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG11-CustomizingImpress.pdf|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG12-KeyboardShortcuts.pdf|Chapter 12 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
</div>
|} 
{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:PDF]]

Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1 Chapters ODT

2026-07-26T11:21:38Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:{{AOo}} 4.1 User Guides (ODT)}}

The {{AOo}} 4.1 guides are presented in chapters for easy use.



{{PDF}} PDF files (.pdf) are available from [https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_User_Guide_Chapters this page].
---- 


{|style="border: 0px solid #666;” cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center
|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Getting Started Guide – V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41GS.odt|Full Book]] — 2026-07-14 (Jul 14) - 10.18 MB
* [[Media:AOO41GS1.odt|Preface]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 81.6 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS2.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2022-05-04 May 04) - 591.1 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS3.odt|Chapter 2   - Using Styles and Templates]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 318.4 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS4.odt|Chapter 3   - Getting Started with Writer]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 732.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS5.odt|Chapter 4   - Getting Started with Calc]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 1200.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS6.odt|Chapter 5   - Getting Started with Impress]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 1200.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS7.odt|Chapter 6   - Getting Started with Draw]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 1.29 MB
* [[Media:AOO41GS8.odt|Chapter 7   - Getting Started with Base]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 978.6 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS9.odt|Chapter 8   - Getting Started with Math]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 452.7 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS10.odt|Chapter 9   - Printing, Exporting, and E‑mailing]] — 2023-05-05 — (May 04) - 768.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS11.odt|Chapter 10 - Graphics, the Gallery, and Fontwork]] — 2023-05-05 — (May 04) - 1602.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS12.odt|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2023-05-05 — (May 04) - 1471.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS13.odt|Chapter 12 - Getting Started with Macros]] — 2026-07-14 — (Jul 14) - 465 KB
</div>


<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Writer Guide — V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41WG.odt|Full Book]] — 2025-06-17 (June 17) - 11,480.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG1-IntroducingWriter.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 675.3 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG2-SettingUpWriter.odt|Chapter 2   - Setting Up Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 667.2 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG3-WorkingWithText.odt|Chapter 3   - Working With Text]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 1,003.4 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG4-FormattingPages.odt|Chapter 4   - Formatting Pages]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 3,328.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG5-PrintingExportingEmailing.odt|Chapter 5   - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-06-21) June 21) - 675.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG6-IntroductionToStyles.odt|Chapter 6   - Introduction To Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 7515.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG7-WorkingWithStyles.odt|Chapter 7   - Working With Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 675.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG8-WorkingWithGraphics.odt|Chapter 8   - Working With Graphics]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 758.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG9-WorkingWithTables.odt|Chapter 9   - Working With Tables]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 365.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG10-WorkingWithTemplatesInWriter.odt|Chapter 10 - Working With Templates In Writer]] — 2025-06-24 (June 24) - 176.4 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG11-UsingMailMerge.odt|Chapter 11 - Using MailMerge]] — 2025-06-24 (June 24) - 13.20.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG12-TOCsIndexesBiblios.odt|Chapter 12 - TOCs Indexes Biblios]] — 2025-06-24 (June 24) - 851.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG13-WorkingWithMasterDocument.odt|Chapter 13 - Working With Master Documents]] — 2025-07-07 (July 07) - 411.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG14-WorkingWithFields.odt|Chapter 14 - Working With Fields]] — 2025-07-14 (July 14) - 1.084 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG15-UsingFormsInWriter.odt|Chapter 15 - Using Forms In Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (July 14) - 486 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG16-CustomizingWriter.odt|Chapter 16 - Customizing Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (July 14) - 392 KB
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Math Guide – V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* [[Media:AOO41MG01.odt|Math Guide]] — 2026-03-16 (March 16) - 873 KB


|width="48%" style="border-right: 1px dotted #999;border-left: 1px dotted #999; "|


{|style="border: 0px solid #666;” cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center
|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Calc Guide – V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41CG.odt|Full Book]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 20.84 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG01-IntroducingCalc.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 914 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG02-EnterEditFormatData.odt|Chapter 2   - Enter Edit Format Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 580 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG03-ChartsAndGraphs.odt|Chapter 3   - Charts And Graphs]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 886 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG04-StylesAndTemplates.odt|Chapter 4   - Styles And Templates]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 289 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG05-UsingGraphicsInCalc.odt|Chapter 5   - Using Graphics In Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 2.14 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG06-PrintingExportingEmailing.odt|Chapter 6   - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 480 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG07-FormulasAndFunctions.odt|Chapter 7   - Formulas And Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 663 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG08-PivotTable.odt|Chapter 8   - Pivot Table]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 1.35 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG09-DataAnalysis.odt|Chapter 9   - Data Analysis]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 306 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG10-LinkingCalcData.odt|Chapter 10 - Linking Calc Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 433 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG11-SharingAndReviewing.odt|Chapter 11 - Sharing And Reviewing]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 339 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG12-CalcMacro.odt|Chapter 12 - Calc Macro]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 296 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG13-CalcAsASimpleDatabase.odt|Chapter 13 - Calc As A Simple Database]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 1.31 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG14-CustomizingCalc.odt|Chapter 14 - Customizing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 612 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG15-KeyboardShortcuts.odt|Chapter 15 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 29.4 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG16-CalcFunctions.odt|Chapter 16 - Calc Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 59.4 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG17-CalcErrorCodes.odt|Chapter 17 - Calc Error Codes]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 42.0 kB
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Draw Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41DG.odt|Full Book]] - 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG01-IntroducingDraw.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Draw]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG02-DrawingBasicShapes.odt|Chapter 2   - Drawing Basic Shapes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG03-WorkingWithObjects.odt|Chapter 3   - Working with Objects and Object Points]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG04-ChangingObjectAttributes.odt|Chapter 4   - Changing Object Attributes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG05-CombiningMultipleObjects.odt|Chapter 5   - Combining Multiple Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG06-EditingPictures.odt|Chapter 6   - Editing Pictures (Raster Graphics)]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG07-3DObjects.odt|Chapter 7   - Working with 3D Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG08-TipsAndTricks.odt|Chapter 8   - Tips and Tricks]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG09-FlowDiagramsOrgCharts.odt|Chapter 9   - Organization Charts, Flow Diagrams, and More]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG10-AdvancedDrawTechniques.odt|Chapter 10 - Advanced Draw Techniques]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Impress Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41IG.odt|Full Book]] - 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG01-IntroducingImpress.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG02-SlideMastersStylesTemplates.odt|Chapter 2   - Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG03-AddFormatText.odt|Chapter 3   - Adding And Formatting Text]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG04-AddFormatPictures.odt|Chapter 4   - Adding And Formatting Pictures]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG05-ManageGraphicObjects.odt|Chapter 5   - Managing Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG06-FormatGraphicObjects.odt|Chapter 6   - Formatting Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG07-SpreadsheetsChartsObjects.odt|Chapter 7   - Including Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG08-SlidesNotesHandouts.odt|Chapter 8   - Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, and Handouts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG09-SlideShows.odt|Chapter 9   - SlideShows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG10-PrintEmailExportSave.odt|Chapter 10 - Printing, e-mailing, exporting and saving slideshows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG11-CustomizingImpress.odt|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG12-KeyboardShortcuts.odt|Chapter 12 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
</div>
|}
{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:ODT]]

File:AOO41GS13.pdf

2026-07-26T11:16:36Z

DiGro: Chapter 12 Getting Started with Macros

== Summary ==
Chapter 12 Getting Started with Macros

File:AOO41GS13.odt

2026-07-26T11:14:05Z

DiGro: Chapter 12 Getting Started with Macros

== Summary ==
Chapter 12 Getting Started with Macros

File:AOO41GS.pdf

2026-07-26T11:08:53Z

DiGro: DiGro heeft een nieuwe versie van File:AOO41GS.pdf geüpload

File:AOO41GS.odt

2026-07-26T11:06:58Z

DiGro: DiGro heeft een nieuwe versie van File:AOO41GS.odt geüpload

Complete 4.1 Getting Started Guide

Category:Icons and symbols

2026-07-25T14:07:54Z

DiGro:

*{{category|icons and symbols}};
* Esta [[Special:Categories|categoria]] contém ícones e símbolos;
* Deze [[Special:Categories|categorie]] bevat pictogrammen en symbolen;
* Diese [[Special:Categories|Kategorie]] enthält icons und symbols;
* Cette [[Special:Categories|catégorie]] contient des icons et symbols;
* Questa [[Special:Categories|categoria]] contiene i icons symbols
* Данная [[Special:Categories|категория]] содержит Значки и символы;

[[Category:Images]]

Template:TopTenViews

2026-07-04T11:53:05Z

DiGro:

<div style="border: 1px solid #999; padding: 5px; border-bottom: none; background: #EEE; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold;">Top 10 Pages</div>
<div style="font-size:85%; padding: 0;">

<DynamicPageList>
namespace =
order = descending
addpagecounter = true
count = 10

format = {| class="wikitable" style="margin: 0; border-left: none; border-right: none; width: 100%; 0;"¶!Pos¶!Page¶!Hits,¶|-¶|%NR%¶|[[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]]¶|%COUNT%,,¶|}
</DynamicPageList>
</div>

<noinclude>
[[Category:Wiki Templates]]
</noinclude>

Template:TopTenViews

2026-07-04T11:52:02Z

DiGro:

<div style="border: 1px solid #999; padding: 5px; border-bottom: none; background: #EEE; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold;">Top 10 Pages</div>
<div style="font-size:85%; padding: 0;">

<DynamicPageList>
namespace =
category = Country
order = descending
addpagecounter = true
count = 10

format = {| class="wikitable" style="margin: 0; border-left: none; border-right: none; width: 100%; 0;"¶!Pos¶!Page¶!Hits,¶|-¶|%NR%¶|[[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]]¶|%COUNT%,,¶|}
</DynamicPageList>
</div>

<noinclude>
[[Category:Wiki Templates]]
</noinclude>

Tutorial Build

2026-07-04T11:33:36Z

DiGro:

<table width=100%>
<tr>
<td align="left">Hack build!</td>
<td align="right">[[Tutorial_Help]]</td>
</tr>
</table>

<hr>

ah! :-) Build svx, build sfx2, build sw, build sd ?!! Time out! What is this build ?

Good question :-) So let's examine it in detail, let's first ask the guy directly first: Issuing 'which build' at the command line returns nothing :-) A second try with 'alias build' starts to explain what's happening:
<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
alias build='perl /home/raul/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/solenv/bin/build.pl'</syntaxhighlight>

hmm... So how did we get this alias set at all ? From sourcing the LinuxIntelEnvSet.sh which does exactly what the name of the file says: It sets the environment for the Linux build of OOo on the Intel platform - so that helps to understand the other SolarisSparcEnvSet.sh as well.

Of what I understand, this file is the end result of the configure process of AOO which is then used for the build process throughout. You can look into the file itself to check what else is in it.

So build is the perl script which is in the top-level solenv project [probably a derivation from Solaris environment] which has most of the build tools in it.

And how does it work ? Let's learn it in the coolest way possible :-) Let's add a top-level project to OOo :-)

We shall with great imagination and creativity call our cool new top-level project as *drum-roll* 'helloworld'! So we start at the top of the build tree with a 'mkdir helloworld' and cd into it
{{Note|So the path to our project now would typically be similar to '/home/raul/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/helloworld' and all further references to our project will simply be referred to in short as helloworld/dir-name/file-name}}

Now let's try to build our new project [already! with nothing in it :-)] by issuing 'build'. oops! In fact, of course, OOPS! :-)

<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
build -- version: 1.130

ERROR: Found no project to build</syntaxhighlight>

hmm... That presents a problem indeed, we do have a project, don't we now ? :-) so let's see where this error is coming up in the first place and then we'll look into fixing them, so first we move into the solenv/ top-level project which as we had mentioned earlier has most of the build tools and where we suspect the source of this error lies as well.

And we go on to grep for the error message through the source with either of a:

<syntaxhighlight lang="bash">
grep -rn "no project to build" *
find solenv/ -exec grep -Hn "no project to build" {} \;
</syntaxhighlight>

and lo! the source is bin/build.pl, so let's look in the source to see what the problem might be, and we see that the build.pl script is looking for a build.lst file in the prj directory and fails otherwise. aha! :-) So we 'touch prj/build.lst' and 'build' again.

<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
build -- version: 1.130
</syntaxhighlight>

hmm... That's not interesting at all, so let's poke it more - our purpose is to actually make a library which we can eventually link to - so let's do just that and we take the shortest route to our goal. We look for someone else who does the same thing and do a similar thing. As the saying goes: "Good artists copy, great artists steal!" Amen! :-)

<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
--- /dev/null 2004-08-25 23:04:59.000000000 +0530
+++ XmlSearch/prj/build.lst 2003-03-19 18:18:40.000000000 +0530
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+xh XmlSearch : external codemaker NULL
+xh XmlSearch\src\com\sun\xmlsearch nmake - all xs NULL
</syntaxhighlight>

So we get inspired from the XmlSearch/prj/build.lst and make up our very own impressive looking build.lst as well:

<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
--- /dev/null 2004-08-25 23:04:59.000000000 +0530
+++ helloworld/prj/build.lst 2004-12-23 23:59:37.000000000 +0530
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+hw helloworld : NULL
+hw helloworld\source nmake - all hw_src NULL
</syntaxhighlight>

It's a fairly simple file that is explained a little more in [[Hacking | the Hacker's Guide]] as well. The first line indicates that it is not dependent on any of the other top-level projects and if it was - the line would be similar to the XmlSearch/ file which indicates that it is dependent on the external/ and codemaker/ projects, which is to say that those projects need to be built before this one can be built.

The second line goes on to indicate what is to be built in the present top-level project and in what order. Our simple line says that the helloworld/source directory will be what is built and since it is particularly simple, there are no other internal build order as might be required in a more complicated projects [fpicker, for instance].

And yay! we have already told our build.pl what needs to be done, so lets do the 'build' thing again:

<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
build -- version: 1.130

ERROR: /home/raul/HEAD/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/helloworld/source not found!!</syntaxhighlight>

That's ok, we can fix that, we havent created the source directory where we intend to place the source that will be built into our library. So we 'mkdir source' and 'build' again:

<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
build -- version: 1.130

/home/raul/HEAD/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/helloworld/source
mkout -- version: 1.3
mkout: ERROR: can't determine module
../unxlngi4.pro/inc/myworld.mk: No such file or directory.
../unxlngi4.pro/misc/s_helloworld.dpcc: No such file or directory.
dmake: Error code 1, while making '../unxlngi4.pro/misc/s_helloworld.dpcc'
'---* TG_SLO.MK *---'

ERROR: Error 65280 occurred while making /home/raul/HEAD/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/helloworld/source
</syntaxhighlight>

yeow! That sounded like an impressive sounding error! Back to square one, we go back to the solenv/ project and grep for the ERROR:

<syntaxhighlight lang="bash">
grep "can't determine module" -rn *
</syntaxhighlight>

We would suspect from the error that it is evidently from the mkout.pl and look in for clues, and we see that it is looking for a prj/d.lst which is definitely not in our project yet, so we do a 'touch prj/d.lst' and 'build' again:

<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
build -- version: 1.130

/home/raul/HEAD/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/helloworld/source
-----------------------------------------------
Error: No makefile.mk found!
-----------------------------------------------
</syntaxhighlight>

Yo! We are halfway there, the build script has reached our source directory and would have built our project, if only there had been something to build :-) So let's fix that next :-)

<hr>

<table width=100%>
<tr>
<td align="left">[http://go-oo.org/tutorials/helloworld-ooo-style.diff.txt helloworld-ooo-style.diff]</td>
<td align="right">Next: [[Tutorial_Library]]</td>
</tr>
</table>

[[Category:Tutorial]]
[[Category:Build_System]]

Tutorial Build

2026-07-04T11:33:08Z

DiGro:

<table width=100%>
<tr>
<td align="left">Hack build!</td>
<td align="right">[[Tutorial_Help]]</td>
</tr>
</table>

<hr>

ah! :-) Build svx, build sfx2, build sw, build sd ?!! Time out! What is this build ?

Good question :-) So let's examine it in detail, let's first ask the guy directly first: Issuing 'which build' at the command line returns nothing :-) A second try with 'alias build' starts to explain what's happening:
<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
alias build='perl /home/raul/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/solenv/bin/build.pl'</syntaxhighlight>

hmm... So how did we get this alias set at all ? From sourcing the LinuxIntelEnvSet.sh which does exactly what the name of the file says: It sets the environment for the Linux build of OOo on the Intel platform - so that helps to understand the other SolarisSparcEnvSet.sh as well.

Of what I understand, this file is the end result of the configure process of AOO which is then used for the build process throughout. You can look into the file itself to check what else is in it.

So build is the perl script which is in the top-level solenv project [probably a derivation from Solaris environment] which has most of the build tools in it.

And how does it work ? Let's learn it in the coolest way possible :-) Let's add a top-level project to OOo :-)

We shall with great imagination and creativity call our cool new top-level project as *drum-roll* 'helloworld'! So we start at the top of the build tree with a 'mkdir helloworld' and cd into it
{{Note:So the path to our project now would typically be similar to '/home/raul/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/helloworld' and all further references to our project will simply be referred to in short as helloworld/dir-name/file-name}}

Now let's try to build our new project [already! with nothing in it :-)] by issuing 'build'. oops! In fact, of course, OOPS! :-)

<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
build -- version: 1.130

ERROR: Found no project to build</syntaxhighlight>

hmm... That presents a problem indeed, we do have a project, don't we now ? :-) so let's see where this error is coming up in the first place and then we'll look into fixing them, so first we move into the solenv/ top-level project which as we had mentioned earlier has most of the build tools and where we suspect the source of this error lies as well.

And we go on to grep for the error message through the source with either of a:

<syntaxhighlight lang="bash">
grep -rn "no project to build" *
find solenv/ -exec grep -Hn "no project to build" {} \;
</syntaxhighlight>

and lo! the source is bin/build.pl, so let's look in the source to see what the problem might be, and we see that the build.pl script is looking for a build.lst file in the prj directory and fails otherwise. aha! :-) So we 'touch prj/build.lst' and 'build' again.

<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
build -- version: 1.130
</syntaxhighlight>

hmm... That's not interesting at all, so let's poke it more - our purpose is to actually make a library which we can eventually link to - so let's do just that and we take the shortest route to our goal. We look for someone else who does the same thing and do a similar thing. As the saying goes: "Good artists copy, great artists steal!" Amen! :-)

<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
--- /dev/null 2004-08-25 23:04:59.000000000 +0530
+++ XmlSearch/prj/build.lst 2003-03-19 18:18:40.000000000 +0530
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+xh XmlSearch : external codemaker NULL
+xh XmlSearch\src\com\sun\xmlsearch nmake - all xs NULL
</syntaxhighlight>

So we get inspired from the XmlSearch/prj/build.lst and make up our very own impressive looking build.lst as well:

<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
--- /dev/null 2004-08-25 23:04:59.000000000 +0530
+++ helloworld/prj/build.lst 2004-12-23 23:59:37.000000000 +0530
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+hw helloworld : NULL
+hw helloworld\source nmake - all hw_src NULL
</syntaxhighlight>

It's a fairly simple file that is explained a little more in [[Hacking | the Hacker's Guide]] as well. The first line indicates that it is not dependent on any of the other top-level projects and if it was - the line would be similar to the XmlSearch/ file which indicates that it is dependent on the external/ and codemaker/ projects, which is to say that those projects need to be built before this one can be built.

The second line goes on to indicate what is to be built in the present top-level project and in what order. Our simple line says that the helloworld/source directory will be what is built and since it is particularly simple, there are no other internal build order as might be required in a more complicated projects [fpicker, for instance].

And yay! we have already told our build.pl what needs to be done, so lets do the 'build' thing again:

<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
build -- version: 1.130

ERROR: /home/raul/HEAD/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/helloworld/source not found!!</syntaxhighlight>

That's ok, we can fix that, we havent created the source directory where we intend to place the source that will be built into our library. So we 'mkdir source' and 'build' again:

<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
build -- version: 1.130

/home/raul/HEAD/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/helloworld/source
mkout -- version: 1.3
mkout: ERROR: can't determine module
../unxlngi4.pro/inc/myworld.mk: No such file or directory.
../unxlngi4.pro/misc/s_helloworld.dpcc: No such file or directory.
dmake: Error code 1, while making '../unxlngi4.pro/misc/s_helloworld.dpcc'
'---* TG_SLO.MK *---'

ERROR: Error 65280 occurred while making /home/raul/HEAD/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/helloworld/source
</syntaxhighlight>

yeow! That sounded like an impressive sounding error! Back to square one, we go back to the solenv/ project and grep for the ERROR:

<syntaxhighlight lang="bash">
grep "can't determine module" -rn *
</syntaxhighlight>

We would suspect from the error that it is evidently from the mkout.pl and look in for clues, and we see that it is looking for a prj/d.lst which is definitely not in our project yet, so we do a 'touch prj/d.lst' and 'build' again:

<syntaxhighlight lang="perl">
build -- version: 1.130

/home/raul/HEAD/ooo-build/build/src680-m65/helloworld/source
-----------------------------------------------
Error: No makefile.mk found!
-----------------------------------------------
</syntaxhighlight>

Yo! We are halfway there, the build script has reached our source directory and would have built our project, if only there had been something to build :-) So let's fix that next :-)

<hr>

<table width=100%>
<tr>
<td align="left">[http://go-oo.org/tutorials/helloworld-ooo-style.diff.txt helloworld-ooo-style.diff]</td>
<td align="right">Next: [[Tutorial_Library]]</td>
</tr>
</table>

[[Category:Tutorial]]
[[Category:Build_System]]

Documentation/Reference/Bibtex-Bibliography Mappings

2026-07-02T11:16:52Z

DiGro:

A much superior approach to bibliographies in {{AOO}} is now provided by '''Jabref'''. See https://www.jabref.org/ for details. Using this program, there is no need to configure the bibliography layout using {{AOO}}, it can all be configured from a powerful *.jstyle file that you provide to Jabref.

Using [[Bibliographic_Software_and_Standards_Information#JabRef|JabRef]] makes an attractive, convenient, cross-platform and cross-application way of maintaining your bibliographic database in plaintext form. JabRef supports export to an .ODS-spreadsheet which can be linked to the bibliographic database, allowing for fairly simple everyday use of JabRef as a bibliography editor.

The only difficulty comes when attempting to work out what {{AOO}} bibliography entry type is output from each corresponding Bibtex (source format) entry type. This page gives those mappings. Unfortunately, they're not always self-evident, and some systems will even have the same type listed more than once in {{AOO}} with different ID numbers.

{| style="border-spacing:0; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto"
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">BibTeX type</span></big>
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:0.035cm solid #000000;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">{{AOO}} type</span></big>

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| TECHREPORT
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Research Report (13)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| BOOK
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Book (1)
|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| ARTICLE
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Journal (7)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| INPROCEEDINGS
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Conference proceedings (6)
|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| MISC
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| (10)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| MASTERSTHESIS
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| (9)
|}

== External links ==

* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX BibTeX (on Wikipedia)]
* [https://docs.jabref.org/cite/openofficeintegration Integration Jabref with Apache OpenOffice]

[[Category:Documentation/Reference]]

Documentation/Reference/Bibtex-Bibliography Mappings

2026-07-02T11:11:02Z

DiGro:

A much superior approach to bibliographies in {{AOO}} is now provided by '''Jabref'''. See https://www.jabref.org/ for details. Using this program, there is no need to configure the bibliography layout using the {{AOO}}, it can all be configured from a powerful *.jstyle file that you provide to Jabref.

Using [[Bibliographic_Software_and_Standards_Information#JabRef|JabRef]] makes an attractive, convenient, cross-platform and cross-application way of maintaining your bibliographic database in plaintext form. JabRef supports export to an .ODS-spreadsheet which can be linked to the bibliographic database, allowing for fairly simple everyday use of JabRef as a bibliography editor.

The only difficulty comes when attempting to work out what OpenOffice bibliography entry type is output from each corresponding Bibtex (source format) entry type. This page gives those mappings. Unfortunately, they're not always self-evident, and some systems will even have the same type listed more than once in {{AOO}} with different ID numbers.

{| style="border-spacing:0; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto"
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">BibTeX type</span></big>
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:0.035cm solid #000000;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">OpenOffice type</span></big>

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| TECHREPORT
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Research Report (13)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| BOOK
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Book (1)
|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| ARTICLE
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Journal (7)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| INPROCEEDINGS
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Conference proceedings (6)
|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| MISC
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| (10)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| MASTERSTHESIS
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| (9)
|}

== External links ==

* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX BibTeX (on Wikipedia)]
* [https://docs.jabref.org/cite/openofficeintegration Integration Jabref with Apache OpenOffice]

[[Category:Documentation/Reference]]

Documentation/Reference/Bibtex-Bibliography Mappings

2026-07-02T11:06:19Z

DiGro: /* External links */

'''Update:''' a much superior approach to bibliographies in OpenOffice is now provided by the '''OpenOffice plugin for Jabref''' (a plugin for Jabref, not for OpenOffice). See http://jabref.sourceforge.net/OOPlugin-jabref.php for details. Using this plugin, there is no need to configure the bibliography layout using the OpenOffice tool, it can all be configured from a powerful *.jstyle file that you provide to Jabref. The 2.6b2 version of Jabref is recommended for use with this plugin (as of Feb 2010).

Using [[Bibliographic_Software_and_Standards_Information#JabRef|JabRef]] makes an attractive, convenient, cross-platform and cross-application way of maintaining your bibliographic database in plaintext form. JabRef supports export to an .ODS spreadsheet which can be linked to the bibliographic database, allowing for fairly simple everyday use of JabRef as a bibliography editor.

The only difficulty comes when attempting to work out what OpenOffice bibliography entry type is output from each corresponding Bibtex (source format) entry type. This page gives those mappings. Unfortunately, they're not always self evident, and some systems will even have the same type listed more than once in OpenOffice with different ID numbers.

{| style="border-spacing:0; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto"
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">BibTeX type</span></big>
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:0.035cm solid #000000;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">OpenOffice type</span></big>

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| TECHREPORT
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Research Report (13)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| BOOK
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Book (1)
|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| ARTICLE
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Journal (7)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| INPROCEEDINGS
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Conference proceedings (6)
|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| MISC
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| (10)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| MASTERSTHESIS
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| (9)
|}

== External links ==

* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX BibTeX (on Wikipedia)]
* [https://docs.jabref.org/cite/openofficeintegration Integration Jabref with Apache OpenOffice]

[[Category:Documentation/Reference]]

Documentation/Reference/Bibtex-Bibliography Mappings

2026-07-02T11:04:47Z

DiGro:

'''Update:''' a much superior approach to bibliographies in OpenOffice is now provided by the '''OpenOffice plugin for Jabref''' (a plugin for Jabref, not for OpenOffice). See http://jabref.sourceforge.net/OOPlugin-jabref.php for details. Using this plugin, there is no need to configure the bibliography layout using the OpenOffice tool, it can all be configured from a powerful *.jstyle file that you provide to Jabref. The 2.6b2 version of Jabref is recommended for use with this plugin (as of Feb 2010).

Using [[Bibliographic_Software_and_Standards_Information#JabRef|JabRef]] makes an attractive, convenient, cross-platform and cross-application way of maintaining your bibliographic database in plaintext form. JabRef supports export to an .ODS spreadsheet which can be linked to the bibliographic database, allowing for fairly simple everyday use of JabRef as a bibliography editor.

The only difficulty comes when attempting to work out what OpenOffice bibliography entry type is output from each corresponding Bibtex (source format) entry type. This page gives those mappings. Unfortunately, they're not always self evident, and some systems will even have the same type listed more than once in OpenOffice with different ID numbers.

{| style="border-spacing:0; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto"
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">BibTeX type</span></big>
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:0.035cm solid #000000;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">OpenOffice type</span></big>

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| TECHREPORT
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Research Report (13)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| BOOK
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Book (1)
|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| ARTICLE
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Journal (7)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| INPROCEEDINGS
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| Conference proceedings (6)
|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| MISC
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| (10)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.097cm;"| MASTERSTHESIS
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding:0.097cm;"| (9)
|}

== External links ==

* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX BibTeX (on Wikipedia)]
* [http://jabref.sourceforge.net/OOPlugin-jabref.php OpenOffice plugin for JabRef]

[[Category:Documentation/Reference]]

Documentation

2026-06-21T12:21:44Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:The Apache OpenOffice Documentation Project}} __NOTOC__

{|
|-
| This project creates and maintains documentation in English for OpenOffice.org and {{AOo}}. Documentation can include user guides, [[Documentation/FAQ|FAQs]], [[Documentation/How Tos|How Tos]], samples, user templates, the application help, and training materials. The project [https://www.openoffice.org/documentation/ has a home page on the web as well].

If you cannot find what you're looking for, check out the [https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/ the OpenOffice User Forum].

This is a wiki, so feel free to contribute to {{AOo}} documentation. Here is the project's [[Documentation/Dashboard|dashboard]], where contributors coordinate their work.

| <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(140, 45, 6); margin: 0px 5px 5px; padding: 1px; float: right; width: 300px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" id="contrib"><div style="padding: 2px; background-color: rgb(140, 45, 6); color: rgb(255, 255, 255); font-weight: bold; text-align: center;">WANT TO HELP?</div>
{|
|-
|
*[[Documentation/Contribute|How to contribute]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard/Wiki Editing Policy|Wiki Editing Policy]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard|Project Dashboard]]
*[[Documentation/Wishlist|Doc Wishlist]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/NeedsRework|Pages that Need Help!]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/BeingEdited|Pages in the Works]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/Candidate|Candidate Pages]]

|}
</div>
|}

{| align="center" cellspacing="8" cellpadding="3" style="border: 0px solid rgb(102, 102, 102);"
|- valign="top"
| width="45%" colspan="2" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Searching/Downloading</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*Search and download documents through the [https://documentation.openoffice.org Documentation Website]

</div>
|- valign="top"

| width="45%" | <div style="padding: 5px; font:color: rgb(0, 68, 204); font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Installation Guide for OpenOffice.org 3.x and 4.x</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*{{PDF}}[[Media:Debian-quickinstall-oo.pdf|4.x Quick Install GNU Linux Debian PDF]] - 2021-01-09 (Jan 9) - 312.9 kb
*{{PDF}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.pdf|3.x PDF]] - 2010-06-06 (June 6) - 470 kb
*{{OOoLogo}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.odt|3.x ODT]] - 2010-06-06 (June 6) - 300 kb
</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_User_Guide_Chapters|User Guides for Apache OpenOffice 4.x]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[https://openoffice-uni.org/ Apache OpenOffice 4.1 Writer for Students in Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, English, French and German]
*[[Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1_User_Guide_Chapters|PDFs of Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT|ODTs of Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]

*[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides#Apache OpenOffice 4.1|Apache OpenOffice 4.1 in wiki format]]

</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/OOo3.3_User_Guide_Chapters|User Guides for OpenOffice.org 3.x]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/OOo3.3_User_Guide_Chapters|PDFs of OpenOffice.org 3.3 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/OOo3.3_Chapters_ODT|ODTs of OpenOffice.org 3.3 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides#OpenOffice.org 3.2|OpenOffice.org 3.2 in wiki format]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Chapters|PDFs of OpenOffice.org 3.2 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Chapters_ODT|ODTs of OpenOffice.org 3.2 User Guides]]
*{{OOoLogo}}[http://documentation.openoffice.org/whitepapers/Creating_large_documents_with_OOo.odt Creating Large Documents with OpenOffice.org Writer] - 2010-02-11 (February 11) - 832 kb
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual|User Guides for OpenOffice.org 2.x]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/FAQ|Frequently Asked Questions]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/FAQ/General|General Questions]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Installation|Installing OpenOffice.org]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Writer|Working with Text Documents (Writer)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Calc|Working with Spreadsheets (Calc)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Draw|Working with Drawings (Draw)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Impress|Working with Presentations (Impress)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Formula|Working with Formulae (Math)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Databases|Working with Databases (Base)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Macros|Macros]]
</div>
| width="45%" style="border-left: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153); border-right: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153);" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Developers/SysAdmin Guides</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Administration Guide|Administration Guide]]
*[[Documentation/BASIC Guide|BASIC Programmers Guide]]
*[[Documentation/Building_Guide_AOO|Building Guide]]
*[[Documentation/DevGuide/OpenOffice.org Developers Guide|Developer's Guide]]
*[[Using_Cpp_with_the_OOo_SDK|Using C++ with the OpenOffice.org SDK]]

</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Wiki Books|Download these guides as PDF / ODT]]
</div>
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/Reference|Reference Lists]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Reference/Math commands|Syntax for Math Formulae]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos/Calc: Functions listed by category|Calc Spreadsheet Functions]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos/Regular Expressions in Writer|Syntax for Regular Expressions in Writer]]
*[[Documentation/Reference/Bibtex-Bibliography Mappings|Bibtex-Bibliography_Mappings]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/How Tos|HOWTOs]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Installation and Setup]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Text Documents]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Databases]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Presentations]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Spreadsheets]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/Tutorials|Tutorials/Screencasts]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Dennis Daniels' Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Carlo Daffara's Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Dai's Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Horst Jens' Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/OpenOffice.org Conceptual Guides|OpenOffice.org Conceptual Guides]]
*[http://plan-b-for-openoffice.org Plan-B For OpenOffice.org Tutorials]

</div>
|}

{{Documentation/Hook}} {{PDL1}}

[[Category:Documentation]] [[Category:Project]]

{{Documentation/Languages}}

Documentation

2026-06-21T12:06:24Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:The Apache OpenOffice Documentation Project}} __NOTOC__

{|
|-
| This project creates and maintains documentation in English for OpenOffice.org and {{AOo}}. Documentation can include user guides, [[Documentation/FAQ|FAQs]], [[Documentation/How Tos|How Tos]], samples, user templates, the application help, and training materials. The project [https://www.openoffice.org/documentation/ has a home page on the web as well].

If you cannot find what you're looking for, check out the [https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/ the OpenOffice User Forum].

This is a wiki, so feel free to contribute to {{AOo}} documentation. Here is the project's [[Documentation/Dashboard|dashboard]], where contributors coordinate their work.

| <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(140, 45, 6); margin: 0px 5px 5px; padding: 1px; float: right; width: 300px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" id="contrib"><div style="padding: 2px; background-color: rgb(140, 45, 6); color: rgb(255, 255, 255); font-weight: bold; text-align: center;">WANT TO HELP?</div>
{|
|-
|
*[[Documentation/Contribute|How to contribute]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard/Wiki Editing Policy|Wiki Editing Policy]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard|Project Dashboard]]
*[[Documentation/Wishlist|Doc Wishlist]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/NeedsRework|Pages that Need Help!]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/BeingEdited|Pages in the Works]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/Candidate|Candidate Pages]]

|}
</div>
|}

{| align="center" cellspacing="8" cellpadding="3" style="border: 0px solid rgb(102, 102, 102);"
|- valign="top"
| width="45%" colspan="2" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Searching/Downloading</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*Search and download documents through the [https://documentation.openoffice.org Documentation Website]

</div>
|- valign="top"

| width="45%" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Installation Guide for OpenOffice.org 3.x and 4.x</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*{{PDF}}[[Media:Debian-quickinstall-oo.pdf|4.x Quick Install GNU Linux Debian PDF]] - 2021-01-09 (Jan 9) - 312.9 kb
*{{PDF}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.pdf|3.x PDF]] - 2010-06-06 (June 6) - 470 kb
*{{OOoLogo}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.odt|3.x ODT]] - 2010-06-06 (June 6) - 300 kb
</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">User Guides for Apache OpenOffice 4.x</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[https://openoffice-uni.org/ Apache OpenOffice 4.1 Writer for Students in Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, English, French and German]
*[[Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1_User_Guide_Chapters|PDFs of Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT|ODTs of Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]

*[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides#Apache OpenOffice 4.1|Apache OpenOffice 4.1 in wiki format]]

</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">User Guides for OpenOffice.org 3.x</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/OOo3.3_User_Guide_Chapters|PDFs of OpenOffice.org 3.3 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/OOo3.3_Chapters_ODT|ODTs of OpenOffice.org 3.3 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides#OpenOffice.org 3.2|OpenOffice.org 3.2 in wiki format]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Chapters|PDFs of OpenOffice.org 3.2 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Chapters_ODT|ODTs of OpenOffice.org 3.2 User Guides]]
*{{OOoLogo}}[http://documentation.openoffice.org/whitepapers/Creating_large_documents_with_OOo.odt Creating Large Documents with OpenOffice.org Writer] - 2010-02-11 (February 11) - 832 kb
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual|User Guides for OpenOffice.org 2.x]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/FAQ|Frequently Asked Questions]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/FAQ/General|General Questions]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Installation|Installing OpenOffice.org]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Writer|Working with Text Documents (Writer)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Calc|Working with Spreadsheets (Calc)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Draw|Working with Drawings (Draw)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Impress|Working with Presentations (Impress)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Formula|Working with Formulae (Math)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Databases|Working with Databases (Base)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Macros|Macros]]
</div>
| width="45%" style="border-left: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153); border-right: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153);" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Developers/SysAdmin Guides</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Administration Guide|Administration Guide]]
*[[Documentation/BASIC Guide|BASIC Programmers Guide]]
*[[Documentation/Building_Guide_AOO|Building Guide]]
*[[Documentation/DevGuide/OpenOffice.org Developers Guide|Developer's Guide]]
*[[Using_Cpp_with_the_OOo_SDK|Using C++ with the OpenOffice.org SDK]]

</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Wiki Books|Download these guides as PDF / ODT]]
</div>
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/Reference|Reference Lists]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Reference/Math commands|Syntax for Math Formulae]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos/Calc: Functions listed by category|Calc Spreadsheet Functions]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos/Regular Expressions in Writer|Syntax for Regular Expressions in Writer]]
*[[Documentation/Reference/Bibtex-Bibliography Mappings|Bibtex-Bibliography_Mappings]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/How Tos|HOWTOs]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Installation and Setup]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Text Documents]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Databases]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Presentations]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Spreadsheets]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/Tutorials|Tutorials/Screencasts]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Dennis Daniels' Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Carlo Daffara's Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Dai's Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Horst Jens' Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/OpenOffice.org Conceptual Guides|OpenOffice.org Conceptual Guides]]
*[http://plan-b-for-openoffice.org Plan-B For OpenOffice.org Tutorials]

</div>
|}

{{Documentation/Hook}} {{PDL1}}

[[Category:Documentation]] [[Category:Project]]

{{Documentation/Languages}}

Documentation

2026-06-21T12:04:58Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:The Apache OpenOffice Documentation Project}} __NOTOC__

{|
|-
| This project creates and maintains documentation in English for OpenOffice.org and {{AOo}}. Documentation can include user guides, [[Documentation/FAQ|FAQs]], [[Documentation/How Tos|How Tos]], samples, user templates, the application help, and training materials. The project [https://www.openoffice.org/documentation/ has a home page on the web as well].

If you cannot find what you're looking for, check out the [https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/ the OpenOffice User Forum].

This is a wiki, so feel free to contribute to {{AOo}} documentation. Here is the project's [[Documentation/Dashboard|dashboard]], where contributors coordinate their work.

| <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(140, 45, 6); margin: 0px 5px 5px; padding: 1px; float: right; width: 300px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" id="contrib"><div style="padding: 2px; background-color: rgb(140, 45, 6); color: rgb(255, 255, 255); font-weight: bold; text-align: center;">WANT TO HELP?</div>
{|
|-
|
*[[Documentation/Contribute|How to contribute]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard/Wiki Editing Policy|Wiki Editing Policy]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard|Project Dashboard]]
*[[Documentation/Wishlist|Doc Wishlist]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/NeedsRework|Pages that Need Help!]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/BeingEdited|Pages in the Works]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/Candidate|Candidate Pages]]

|}
</div>
|}

{| align="center" cellspacing="8" cellpadding="3" style="border: 0px solid rgb(102, 102, 102);"
|- valign="top"
| width="45%" colspan="2" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Searching/Downloading</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*Search and download documents through the [https://documentation.openoffice.org Documentation Website]
*or, type here to search this Documentation Wiki: <google />
</div>
|- valign="top"

| width="45%" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Installation Guide for OpenOffice.org 3.x and 4.x</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*{{PDF}}[[Media:Debian-quickinstall-oo.pdf|4.x Quick Install GNU Linux Debian PDF]] - 2021-01-09 (Jan 9) - 312.9 kb
*{{PDF}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.pdf|3.x PDF]] - 2010-06-06 (June 6) - 470 kb
*{{OOoLogo}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.odt|3.x ODT]] - 2010-06-06 (June 6) - 300 kb
</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">User Guides for Apache OpenOffice 4.x</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[https://openoffice-uni.org/ Apache OpenOffice 4.1 Writer for Students in Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, English, French and German]
*[[Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1_User_Guide_Chapters|PDFs of Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT|ODTs of Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]

*[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides#Apache OpenOffice 4.1|Apache OpenOffice 4.1 in wiki format]]

</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">User Guides for OpenOffice.org 3.x</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/OOo3.3_User_Guide_Chapters|PDFs of OpenOffice.org 3.3 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/OOo3.3_Chapters_ODT|ODTs of OpenOffice.org 3.3 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides#OpenOffice.org 3.2|OpenOffice.org 3.2 in wiki format]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Chapters|PDFs of OpenOffice.org 3.2 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Chapters_ODT|ODTs of OpenOffice.org 3.2 User Guides]]
*{{OOoLogo}}[http://documentation.openoffice.org/whitepapers/Creating_large_documents_with_OOo.odt Creating Large Documents with OpenOffice.org Writer] - 2010-02-11 (February 11) - 832 kb
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual|User Guides for OpenOffice.org 2.x]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/FAQ|Frequently Asked Questions]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/FAQ/General|General Questions]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Installation|Installing OpenOffice.org]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Writer|Working with Text Documents (Writer)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Calc|Working with Spreadsheets (Calc)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Draw|Working with Drawings (Draw)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Impress|Working with Presentations (Impress)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Formula|Working with Formulae (Math)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Databases|Working with Databases (Base)]]
*[[Documentation/FAQ/Macros|Macros]]
</div>
| width="45%" style="border-left: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153); border-right: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153);" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Developers/SysAdmin Guides</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Administration Guide|Administration Guide]]
*[[Documentation/BASIC Guide|BASIC Programmers Guide]]
*[[Documentation/Building_Guide_AOO|Building Guide]]
*[[Documentation/DevGuide/OpenOffice.org Developers Guide|Developer's Guide]]
*[[Using_Cpp_with_the_OOo_SDK|Using C++ with the OpenOffice.org SDK]]

</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Wiki Books|Download these guides as PDF / ODT]]
</div>
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/Reference|Reference Lists]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Reference/Math commands|Syntax for Math Formulae]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos/Calc: Functions listed by category|Calc Spreadsheet Functions]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos/Regular Expressions in Writer|Syntax for Regular Expressions in Writer]]
*[[Documentation/Reference/Bibtex-Bibliography Mappings|Bibtex-Bibliography_Mappings]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/How Tos|HOWTOs]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Installation and Setup]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Text Documents]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Databases]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Presentations]]
*[[Documentation/How Tos|Spreadsheets]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/Tutorials|Tutorials/Screencasts]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Dennis Daniels' Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Carlo Daffara's Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Dai's Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/Tutorials|Horst Jens' Tutorials]]
*[[Documentation/OpenOffice.org Conceptual Guides|OpenOffice.org Conceptual Guides]]
*[http://plan-b-for-openoffice.org Plan-B For OpenOffice.org Tutorials]

</div>
|}

{{Documentation/Hook}} {{PDL1}}

[[Category:Documentation]] [[Category:Project]]

{{Documentation/Languages}}

Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1 User Guide Chapters

2026-06-21T12:01:31Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:{{AOo}} 4.1 User Guides (PDF)}}

The {{AOo}} 4.1 guides are presented in chapters for easy use.



Editable files (.odt) are available from [https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT this page].
---- 


{|style="border: 0px solid #666;" cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center

|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Getting Started Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS.pdf|Full Book]] - 2023-06-05 — (Jun 05)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS1.pdf|Preface]] - 2023-05-04 — May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS2.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS3.pdf|Chapter 2   - Styles and Templates]] — 2023-05-04 - (Apr 27)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS4.pdf|Chapter 3   - Getting Started with Writer]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS5.pdf|Chapter 4   - Getting Started with Calc]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS6.pdf|Chapter 5   - Getting Started with Impress]]— 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS7.pdf|Chapter 6   - Getting Started with Draw]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS8.pdf|Chapter 7   - Getting Started with Base]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS9.pdf|Chapter 8   - Getting Started with Math]] — 2023-05-05 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS10.pdf|Chapter 9   - Printing, Exporting, and E-mailing]] — 2023-04-27 - (Apr 27)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS11.pdf|Chapter 10 - Graphics, the Gallery, and Fontworks]] — 2022-12-30 - (Dec 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS12.pdf|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2022-12-30 - (Dec 30)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Writer Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-06-17 (Jun 17)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG1-IntroducingWriter.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Writer]] — 2023-07-31 (Jul 31)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG2-SettingUpWriter.pdf|Chapter 2   - Setting Up Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG3-WorkingWithText.pdf|Chapter 3   - Working with Text]] — 2023-11-10 (Nov 10)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG4-FormattingPages.pdf|Chapter 4   - Formatting Pages]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG5-PrintingExportingEmailing.pdf|Chapter 5   - Printing, Exporting, Emailing]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG6-IntroductionToStyles.pdf|Chapter 6   - Introduction to Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG7-WorkingWithStyles.pdf|Chapter 7   - Working with Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG8-WorkingWithGraphics.pdf|Chapter 8   - Working with Graphics]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG9-WorkingWithTables.pdf|Chapter 9   - Working with Tables]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG10-WorkingWithTemplatesInWriter.pdf|Chapter 10 - Working with Templates in Writer]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG11-UsingMailMerge.pdf|Chapter 11 - Using Mail Merge]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG12-TOCsIndexesBiblios.pdf|Chapter 12 - Tables of Contents, Indexes, and Bibliographies]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG13-WorkingWithMasterDocument.pdf|Chapter 13 - Working with Master Documents]] — 2025-07-07 (Jul 7)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG14-WorkingWithFields.pdf|Chapter 14 - Working with Fields]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG15-UsingFormsInWriter.pdf|Chapter 15 - Using Forms in Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG16-CustomizingWriter.pdf|Chapter 16 - Customizing Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Math Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41MG01.pdf|Math Guide]] — 2026-03-16 (March 16)


|width="45%" style="border-right: 1px dotted #999;border-left: 1px dotted #999; "|


<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Calc Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG01-IntroducingCalc.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG02-EnterEditFormatData.pdf|Chapter 2   - Enter Edit Format Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG03-ChartsAndGraphs.pdf|Chapter 3   - Charts And Graphs]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG04-StylesAndTemplates.pdf|Chapter 4   - Styles And Templates]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG05-UsingGraphicsInCalc.pdf|Chapter 5   - Using Graphics In Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG06-PrintingExportingEmailing.pdf|Chapter 6   - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG07-FormulasAndFunctions.pdf|Chapter 7   - Formulas And Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG08-PivotTable.pdf|Chapter 8   - Pivot Table]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG09-DataAnalysis.pdf|Chapter 9   - Data Analysis]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG10-LinkingCalcData.pdf|Chapter 10 - Linking Calc Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG11-SharingAndReviewing.pdf|Chapter 11 - Sharing And Reviewing]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG12-CalcMacro.pdf|Chapter 12 - Calc Macro]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG13-CalcAsASimpleDatabase.pdf|Chapter 13 - Calc As A Simple Database]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG14-CustomizingCalc.pdf|Chapter 14 - Customizing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG15-KeyboardShortcuts.pdf|Chapter 15 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG16-CalcFunctions.pdf|Chapter 16 - Calc Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG17-CalcErrorCodes.pdf|Chapter 17 - Calc Error Codes]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Draw Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG01-IntroducingDraw.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Draw]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG02-DrawingBasicShapes.pdf|Chapter 2   - Drawing Basic Shapes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG03-WorkingWithObjects.pdf|Chapter 3   - Working with Objects and Object Points]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG04-ChangingObjectAttributes.pdf|Chapter 4   - Changing Object Attributes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG05-CombiningMultipleObjects.pdf|Chapter 5   - Combining Multiple Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG06-EditingPictures.pdf|Chapter 6   - Editing Pictures (Raster Graphics)]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG07-3DObjects.pdf|Chapter 7   - Working with 3D Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG08-TipsAndTricks.pdf|Chapter 8   - Tips and Tricks]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG09-FlowDiagramsOrgCharts.pdf|Chapter 9   - Organization Charts, Flow Diagrams, and More]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG10-AdvancedDrawTechniques.pdf|Chapter 10 - Advanced Draw Techniques]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Impress Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG01-IntroducingImpress.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG02-SlideMastersStylesTemplates.pdf|Chapter 2   - Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG03-AddFormatText.pdf|Chapter 3   - Adding And Formatting Text]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG04-AddFormatPictures.pdf|Chapter 4   - Adding And Formatting Pictures]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG05-ManageGraphicObjects.pdf|Chapter 5   - Managing Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG06-FormatGraphicObjects.pdf|Chapter 6   - Formatting Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG07-SpreadsheetsChartsObjects.pdf|Chapter 7   - Including Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG08-SlidesNotesHandouts.pdf|Chapter 8   - Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, and Handouts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG09-SlideShows.pdf|Chapter 9   - SlideShows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG10-PrintEmailExportSave.pdf|Chapter 10 - Printing, e-mailing, exporting and saving slideshows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG11-CustomizingImpress.pdf|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG12-KeyboardShortcuts.pdf|Chapter 12 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
</div>
|} 
{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:PDF]]

Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1 Chapters ODT

2026-06-21T12:00:38Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:{{AOo}} 4.1 User Guides (ODT)}}

The {{AOo}} 4.1 guides are presented in chapters for easy use.



{{PDF}} PDF files (.pdf) are available from [https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_User_Guide_Chapters this page].
---- 


{|style="border: 0px solid #666;” cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center
|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Getting Started Guide – V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41GS.odt|Full Book]] — 2023-06-05 (Jun 05) - 4.78 MB
* [[Media:AOO41GS1.odt|Preface]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 81.6 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS2.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2022-05-04 May 04) - 591.1 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS3.odt|Chapter 2   - Using Styles and Templates]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 318.4 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS4.odt|Chapter 3   - Getting Started with Writer]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 732.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS5.odt|Chapter 4   - Getting Started with Calc]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 1200.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS6.odt|Chapter 5   - Getting Started with Impress]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 1200.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS7.odt|Chapter 6   - Getting Started with Draw]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 1.29 MB
* [[Media:AOO41GS8.odt|Chapter 7   - Getting Started with Base]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 978.6 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS9.odt|Chapter 8   - Getting Started with Math]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 452.7 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS10.odt|Chapter 9   - Printing, Exporting, and E‑mailing]] — 2023-05-05 — (May 04) - 768.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS11.odt|Chapter 10 - Graphics, the Gallery, and Fontwork]] — 2023-05-05 — (May 04) - 1602.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS12.odt|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2023-05-05 — (May 04) - 1471.9 KB
</div>


<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Writer Guide — V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41WG.odt|Full Book]] — 2025-06-17 (June 17) - 11,480.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG1-IntroducingWriter.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 675.3 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG2-SettingUpWriter.odt|Chapter 2   - Setting Up Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 667.2 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG3-WorkingWithText.odt|Chapter 3   - Working With Text]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 1,003.4 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG4-FormattingPages.odt|Chapter 4   - Formatting Pages]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 3,328.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG5-PrintingExportingEmailing.odt|Chapter 5   - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-06-21) June 21) - 675.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG6-IntroductionToStyles.odt|Chapter 6   - Introduction To Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 7515.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG7-WorkingWithStyles.odt|Chapter 7   - Working With Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 675.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG8-WorkingWithGraphics.odt|Chapter 8   - Working With Graphics]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 758.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG9-WorkingWithTables.odt|Chapter 9   - Working With Tables]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 365.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG10-WorkingWithTemplatesInWriter.odt|Chapter 10 - Working With Templates In Writer]] — 2025-06-24 (June 24) - 176.4 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG11-UsingMailMerge.odt|Chapter 11 - Using MailMerge]] — 2025-06-24 (June 24) - 13.20.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG12-TOCsIndexesBiblios.odt|Chapter 12 - TOCs Indexes Biblios]] — 2025-06-24 (June 24) - 851.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG13-WorkingWithMasterDocument.odt|Chapter 13 - Working With Master Documents]] — 2025-07-07 (July 07) - 411.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG14-WorkingWithFields.odt|Chapter 14 - Working With Fields]] — 2025-07-14 (July 14) - 1.084 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG15-UsingFormsInWriter.odt|Chapter 15 - Using Forms In Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (July 14) - 486 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG16-CustomizingWriter.odt|Chapter 16 - Customizing Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (July 14) - 392 KB
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Math Guide – V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* [[Media:AOO41MG01.odt|Math Guide]] — 2026-03-16 (March 16) - 873 KB


|width="48%" style="border-right: 1px dotted #999;border-left: 1px dotted #999; "|


{|style="border: 0px solid #666;” cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center
|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Calc Guide – V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41CG.odt|Full Book]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 20.84 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG01-IntroducingCalc.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 914 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG02-EnterEditFormatData.odt|Chapter 2   - Enter Edit Format Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 580 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG03-ChartsAndGraphs.odt|Chapter 3   - Charts And Graphs]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 886 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG04-StylesAndTemplates.odt|Chapter 4   - Styles And Templates]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 289 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG05-UsingGraphicsInCalc.odt|Chapter 5   - Using Graphics In Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 2.14 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG06-PrintingExportingEmailing.odt|Chapter 6   - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 480 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG07-FormulasAndFunctions.odt|Chapter 7   - Formulas And Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 663 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG08-PivotTable.odt|Chapter 8   - Pivot Table]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 1.35 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG09-DataAnalysis.odt|Chapter 9   - Data Analysis]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 306 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG10-LinkingCalcData.odt|Chapter 10 - Linking Calc Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 433 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG11-SharingAndReviewing.odt|Chapter 11 - Sharing And Reviewing]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 339 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG12-CalcMacro.odt|Chapter 12 - Calc Macro]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 296 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG13-CalcAsASimpleDatabase.odt|Chapter 13 - Calc As A Simple Database]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 1.31 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG14-CustomizingCalc.odt|Chapter 14 - Customizing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 612 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG15-KeyboardShortcuts.odt|Chapter 15 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 29.4 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG16-CalcFunctions.odt|Chapter 16 - Calc Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 59.4 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG17-CalcErrorCodes.odt|Chapter 17 - Calc Error Codes]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 42.0 kB
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Draw Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41DG.odt|Full Book]] - 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG01-IntroducingDraw.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Draw]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG02-DrawingBasicShapes.odt|Chapter 2   - Drawing Basic Shapes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG03-WorkingWithObjects.odt|Chapter 3   - Working with Objects and Object Points]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG04-ChangingObjectAttributes.odt|Chapter 4   - Changing Object Attributes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG05-CombiningMultipleObjects.odt|Chapter 5   - Combining Multiple Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG06-EditingPictures.odt|Chapter 6   - Editing Pictures (Raster Graphics)]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG07-3DObjects.odt|Chapter 7   - Working with 3D Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG08-TipsAndTricks.odt|Chapter 8   - Tips and Tricks]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG09-FlowDiagramsOrgCharts.odt|Chapter 9   - Organization Charts, Flow Diagrams, and More]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG10-AdvancedDrawTechniques.odt|Chapter 10 - Advanced Draw Techniques]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Impress Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41IG.odt|Full Book]] - 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG01-IntroducingImpress.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG02-SlideMastersStylesTemplates.odt|Chapter 2   - Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG03-AddFormatText.odt|Chapter 3   - Adding And Formatting Text]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG04-AddFormatPictures.odt|Chapter 4   - Adding And Formatting Pictures]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG05-ManageGraphicObjects.odt|Chapter 5   - Managing Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG06-FormatGraphicObjects.odt|Chapter 6   - Formatting Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG07-SpreadsheetsChartsObjects.odt|Chapter 7   - Including Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG08-SlidesNotesHandouts.odt|Chapter 8   - Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, and Handouts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG09-SlideShows.odt|Chapter 9   - SlideShows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG10-PrintEmailExportSave.odt|Chapter 10 - Printing, e-mailing, exporting and saving slideshows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG11-CustomizingImpress.odt|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG12-KeyboardShortcuts.odt|Chapter 12 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
</div>
|}
{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:ODT]]

Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1 Chapters ODT

2026-06-21T11:58:53Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:{{AOo}} 4.1 User Guides (ODT)}}

The {{AOo}} 4.1 guides are presented in chapters for easy use.



{{PDF}} PDF files (.pdf) are available from [https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_User_Guide_Chapters this page].
---- 


{|style="border: 0px solid #666;” cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center
|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Getting Started Guide – V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41GS.odt|Full Book]] — 2023-06-05 (Jun 05) - 4.78 MB
* [[Media:AOO41GS1.odt|Preface]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 81.6 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS2.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2022-05-04 May 04) - 591.1 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS3.odt|Chapter 2   - Using Styles and Templates]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 318.4 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS4.odt|Chapter 3   - Getting Started with Writer]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 732.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS5.odt|Chapter 4   - Getting Started with Calc]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 1200.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS6.odt|Chapter 5   - Getting Started with Impress]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 1200.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS7.odt|Chapter 6   - Getting Started with Draw]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 1.29 MB
* [[Media:AOO41GS8.odt|Chapter 7   - Getting Started with Base]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 978.6 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS9.odt|Chapter 8   - Getting Started with Math]] — 2023-05-04 (May 04) - 452.7 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS10.odt|Chapter 9   - Printing, Exporting, and E‑mailing]] — 2023-05-05 — (May 04) - 768.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS11.odt|Chapter 10 - Graphics, the Gallery, and Fontwork]] — 2023-05-05 — (May 04) - 1602.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41GS12.odt|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2023-05-05 — (May 04) - 1471.9 KB
</div>


<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Writer Guide — V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41WG.odt|Full Book]] — 2025-06-17 (June 17) - 11,480.8 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG1-IntroducingWriter.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 675.3 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG2-SettingUpWriter.odt|Chapter 2   - Setting Up Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 667.2 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG3-WorkingWithText.odt|Chapter 3   - Working With Text]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 1,003.4 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG4-FormattingPages.odt|Chapter 4   - Formatting Pages]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 3,328.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG5-PrintingExportingEmailing.odt|Chapter 5   - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-06-21) June 21) - 675.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG6-IntroductionToStyles.odt|Chapter 6   - Introduction To Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 7515.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG7-WorkingWithStyles.odt|Chapter 7   - Working With Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 675.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG8-WorkingWithGraphics.odt|Chapter 8   - Working With Graphics]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 758.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG9-WorkingWithTables.odt|Chapter 9   - Working With Tables]] — 2025-06-21 (June 21) - 365.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG10-WorkingWithTemplatesInWriter.odt|Chapter 10 - Working With Templates In Writer]] — 2025-06-24 (June 24) - 176.4 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG11-UsingMailMerge.odt|Chapter 11 - Using MailMerge]] — 2025-06-24 (June 24) - 13.20.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG12-TOCsIndexesBiblios.odt|Chapter 12 - TOCs Indexes Biblios]] — 2025-06-24 (June 24) - 851.0 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG13-WorkingWithMasterDocument.odt|Chapter 13 - Working With Master Documents]] — 2025-07-07 (July 07) - 411.9 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG14-WorkingWithFields.odt|Chapter 14 - Working With Fields]] — 2025-07-14 (July 14) - 1.084 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG15-UsingFormsInWriter.odt|Chapter 15 - Using Forms In Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (July 14) - 486 KB
* [[Media:AOO41WG16-CustomizingWriter.odt|Chapter 16 - Customizing Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (July 14) - 392 KB
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Math Guide – V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* [[Media:AOO41MG01.odt|Math Guide]] — 2026-03-16 (March 16) - 873 KB


|width="48%" style="border-right: 1px dotted #999;border-left: 1px dotted #999; "|


{|style="border: 0px solid #666;” cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center
|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Calc Guide – V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41CG.odt|Full Book]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 20.84 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG01-IntroducingCalc.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 914 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG02-EnterEditFormatData.odt|Chapter 2   - Enter Edit Format Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 580 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG03-ChartsAndGraphs.odt|Chapter 3   - Charts And Graphs]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 886 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG04-StylesAndTemplates.odt|Chapter 4   - Styles And Templates]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 289 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG05-UsingGraphicsInCalc.odt|Chapter 5   - Using Graphics In Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 2.14 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG06-PrintingExportingEmailing.odt|Chapter 6   - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 480 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG07-FormulasAndFunctions.odt|Chapter 7   - Formulas And Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 663 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG08-PivotTable.odt|Chapter 8   - Pivot Table]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 1.35 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG09-DataAnalysis.odt|Chapter 9   - Data Analysis]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 306 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG10-LinkingCalcData.odt|Chapter 10 - Linking Calc Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 433 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG11-SharingAndReviewing.odt|Chapter 11 - Sharing And Reviewing]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 339 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG12-CalcMacro.odt|Chapter 12 - Calc Macro]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 296 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG13-CalcAsASimpleDatabase.odt|Chapter 13 - Calc As A Simple Database]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 1.31 MB
* [[Media:AOO41CG14-CustomizingCalc.odt|Chapter 14 - Customizing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 612 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG15-KeyboardShortcuts.odt|Chapter 15 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 29.4 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG16-CalcFunctions.odt|Chapter 16 - Calc Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 59.4 kB
* [[Media:AOO41CG17-CalcErrorCodes.odt|Chapter 17 - Calc Error Codes]] — 2025-09-02 (September 2) - 42.0 kB
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Draw Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41DG.odt|Full Book]] - 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG01-IntroducingDraw.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Draw]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG02-DrawingBasicShapes.odt|Chapter 2   - Drawing Basic Shapes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG03-WorkingWithObjects.odt|Chapter 3   - Working with Objects and Object Points]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG04-ChangingObjectAttributes.odt|Chapter 4   - Changing Object Attributes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG05-CombiningMultipleObjects.odt|Chapter 5   - Combining Multiple Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG06-EditingPictures.odt|Chapter 6   - Editing Pictures (Raster Graphics)]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG07-3DObjects.odt|Chapter 7   - Working with 3D Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG08-TipsAndTricks.odt|Chapter 8   - Tips and Tricks]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG09-FlowDiagramsOrgCharts.odt|Chapter 9 - Organization Charts, Flow Diagrams, and More]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* [[Media:AOO41DG10-AdvancedDrawTechniques.odt|Chapter 10 - Advanced Draw Techniques]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Impress Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AOO41IG.odt|Full Book]] - 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG01-IntroducingImpress.odt|Chapter 1   - Introducing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG02-SlideMastersStylesTemplates.odt|Chapter 2   - Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG03-AddFormatText.odt|Chapter 3   - Adding And Formatting Text]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG04-AddFormatPictures.odt|Chapter 4   - Adding And Formatting Pictures]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG05-ManageGraphicObjects.odt|Chapter 5   - Managing Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG06-FormatGraphicObjects.odt|Chapter 6   - Formatting Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG07-SpreadsheetsChartsObjects.odt|Chapter 7   - Including Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG08-SlidesNotesHandouts.odt|Chapter 8   - Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, and Handouts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG09-SlideShows.odt|Chapter 9   - SlideShows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG10-PrintEmailExportSave.odt|Chapter 10 - Printing, e-mailing, exporting and saving slideshows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG11-CustomizingImpress.odt|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* [[Media:AOO41IG12-KeyboardShortcuts.odt|Chapter 12 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
</div>
|}
{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:ODT]]

Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1 User Guide Chapters

2026-06-21T11:54:40Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:{{AOo}} 4.1 User Guides (PDF)}}

The {{AOo}} 4.1 guides are presented in chapters for easy use.



Editable files (.odt) are available from [https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT this page].
----

{|style="border: 0px solid #666;" cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center

|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Getting Started Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS.pdf|Full Book]] - 2023-06-05 — (Jun 05)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS1.pdf|Preface]] - 2023-05-04 — May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS2.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS3.pdf|Chapter 2   - Styles and Templates]] — 2023-05-04 - (Apr 27)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS4.pdf|Chapter 3   - Getting Started with Writer]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS5.pdf|Chapter 4   - Getting Started with Calc]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS6.pdf|Chapter 5   - Getting Started with Impress]]— 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS7.pdf|Chapter 6   - Getting Started with Draw]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS8.pdf|Chapter 7   - Getting Started with Base]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS9.pdf|Chapter 8   - Getting Started with Math]] — 2023-05-05 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS10.pdf|Chapter 9   - Printing, Exporting, and E-mailing]] — 2023-04-27 - (Apr 27)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS11.pdf|Chapter 10 - Graphics, the Gallery, and Fontworks]] — 2022-12-30 - (Dec 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS12.pdf|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2022-12-30 - (Dec 30)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Writer Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-06-17 (Jun 17)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG1-IntroducingWriter.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Writer]] — 2023-07-31 (Jul 31)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG2-SettingUpWriter.pdf|Chapter 2   - Setting Up Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG3-WorkingWithText.pdf|Chapter 3   - Working with Text]] — 2023-11-10 (Nov 10)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG4-FormattingPages.pdf|Chapter 4   - Formatting Pages]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG5-PrintingExportingEmailing.pdf|Chapter 5   - Printing, Exporting, Emailing]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG6-IntroductionToStyles.pdf|Chapter 6   - Introduction to Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG7-WorkingWithStyles.pdf|Chapter 7   - Working with Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG8-WorkingWithGraphics.pdf|Chapter 8   - Working with Graphics]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG9-WorkingWithTables.pdf|Chapter 9   - Working with Tables]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG10-WorkingWithTemplatesInWriter.pdf|Chapter 10 - Working with Templates in Writer]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG11-UsingMailMerge.pdf|Chapter 11 - Using Mail Merge]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG12-TOCsIndexesBiblios.pdf|Chapter 12 - Tables of Contents, Indexes, and Bibliographies]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG13-WorkingWithMasterDocument.pdf|Chapter 13 - Working with Master Documents]] — 2025-07-07 (Jul 7)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG14-WorkingWithFields.pdf|Chapter 14 - Working with Fields]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG15-UsingFormsInWriter.pdf|Chapter 15 - Using Forms in Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG16-CustomizingWriter.pdf|Chapter 16 - Customizing Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Math Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41MG01.pdf|Math Guide]] — 2026-03-16 (March 16)


|width="45%" style="border-right: 1px dotted #999;border-left: 1px dotted #999; "|


<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Calc Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG01-IntroducingCalc.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG02-EnterEditFormatData.pdf|Chapter 2   - Enter Edit Format Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG03-ChartsAndGraphs.pdf|Chapter 3   - Charts And Graphs]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG04-StylesAndTemplates.pdf|Chapter 4   - Styles And Templates]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG05-UsingGraphicsInCalc.pdf|Chapter 5   - Using Graphics In Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG06-PrintingExportingEmailing.pdf|Chapter 6   - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG07-FormulasAndFunctions.pdf|Chapter 7   - Formulas And Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG08-PivotTable.pdf|Chapter 8   - Pivot Table]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG09-DataAnalysis.pdf|Chapter 9   - Data Analysis]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG10-LinkingCalcData.pdf|Chapter 10 - Linking Calc Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG11-SharingAndReviewing.pdf|Chapter 11 - Sharing And Reviewing]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG12-CalcMacro.pdf|Chapter 12 - Calc Macro]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG13-CalcAsASimpleDatabase.pdf|Chapter 13 - Calc As A Simple Database]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG14-CustomizingCalc.pdf|Chapter 14 - Customizing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG15-KeyboardShortcuts.pdf|Chapter 15 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG16-CalcFunctions.pdf|Chapter 16 - Calc Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG17-CalcErrorCodes.pdf|Chapter 17 - Calc Error Codes]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Draw Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG01-IntroducingDraw.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Draw]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG02-DrawingBasicShapes.pdf|Chapter 2   - Drawing Basic Shapes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG03-WorkingWithObjects.pdf|Chapter 3   - Working with Objects and Object Points]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG04-ChangingObjectAttributes.pdf|Chapter 4   - Changing Object Attributes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG05-CombiningMultipleObjects.pdf|Chapter 5   - Combining Multiple Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG06-EditingPictures.pdf|Chapter 6   - Editing Pictures (Raster Graphics)]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG07-3DObjects.pdf|Chapter 7   - Working with 3D Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG08-TipsAndTricks.pdf|Chapter 8   - Tips and Tricks]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG09-FlowDiagramsOrgCharts.pdf|Chapter 9   - Organization Charts, Flow Diagrams, and More]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG10-AdvancedDrawTechniques.pdf|Chapter 10 - Advanced Draw Techniques]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Impress Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG01-IntroducingImpress.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG02-SlideMastersStylesTemplates.pdf|Chapter 2   - Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG03-AddFormatText.pdf|Chapter 3   - Adding And Formatting Text]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG04-AddFormatPictures.pdf|Chapter 4   - Adding And Formatting Pictures]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG05-ManageGraphicObjects.pdf|Chapter 5   - Managing Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG06-FormatGraphicObjects.pdf|Chapter 6   - Formatting Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG07-SpreadsheetsChartsObjects.pdf|Chapter 7   - Including Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG08-SlidesNotesHandouts.pdf|Chapter 8   - Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, and Handouts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG09-SlideShows.pdf|Chapter 9   - SlideShows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG10-PrintEmailExportSave.pdf|Chapter 10 - Printing, e-mailing, exporting and saving slideshows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG11-CustomizingImpress.pdf|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG12-KeyboardShortcuts.pdf|Chapter 12 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
</div>
|} 
{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:PDF]]

Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1 User Guide Chapters

2026-06-21T11:47:36Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:{{AOo}} 4.1 User Guides (PDF)}}

The {{AOo}} 4.1 guides are presented in chapters for easy use.

{{Note|These Guides are in process and will be added here as they become available}}

Editable files (.odt) are available from [https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT this page].
----

{|style="border: 0px solid #666;" cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center

|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Getting Started Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS.pdf|Full Book]] - 2023-06-05 — (Jun 05)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS1.pdf|Preface]] - 2023-05-04 — May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS2.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS3.pdf|Chapter 2   - Styles and Templates]] — 2023-05-04 - (Apr 27)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS4.pdf|Chapter 3   - Getting Started with Writer]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS5.pdf|Chapter 4   - Getting Started with Calc]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS6.pdf|Chapter 5   - Getting Started with Impress]]— 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS7.pdf|Chapter 6   - Getting Started with Draw]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS8.pdf|Chapter 7   - Getting Started with Base]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS9.pdf|Chapter 8   - Getting Started with Math]] — 2023-05-05 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS10.pdf|Chapter 9   - Printing, Exporting, and E-mailing]] — 2023-04-27 - (Apr 27)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS11.pdf|Chapter 10 - Graphics, the Gallery, and Fontworks]] — 2022-12-30 - (Dec 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS12.pdf|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2022-12-30 - (Dec 30)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Writer Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-06-17 (Jun 17)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG1-IntroducingWriter.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Writer]] — 2023-07-31 (Jul 31)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG2-SettingUpWriter.pdf|Chapter 2   - Setting Up Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG3-WorkingWithText.pdf|Chapter 3   - Working with Text]] — 2023-11-10 (Nov 10)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG4-FormattingPages.pdf|Chapter 4   - Formatting Pages]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG5-PrintingExportingEmailing.pdf|Chapter 5   - Printing, Exporting, Emailing]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG6-IntroductionToStyles.pdf|Chapter 6   - Introduction to Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG7-WorkingWithStyles.pdf|Chapter 7   - Working with Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG8-WorkingWithGraphics.pdf|Chapter 8   - Working with Graphics]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG9-WorkingWithTables.pdf|Chapter 9   - Working with Tables]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG10-WorkingWithTemplatesInWriter.pdf|Chapter 10 - Working with Templates in Writer]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG11-UsingMailMerge.pdf|Chapter 11 - Using Mail Merge]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG12-TOCsIndexesBiblios.pdf|Chapter 12 - Tables of Contents, Indexes, and Bibliographies]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG13-WorkingWithMasterDocument.pdf|Chapter 13 - Working with Master Documents]] — 2025-07-07 (Jul 7)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG14-WorkingWithFields.pdf|Chapter 14 - Working with Fields]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG15-UsingFormsInWriter.pdf|Chapter 15 - Using Forms in Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG16-CustomizingWriter.pdf|Chapter 16 - Customizing Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Math Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41MG01.pdf|Math Guide]] — 2026-03-16 (March 16)


|width="45%" style="border-right: 1px dotted #999;border-left: 1px dotted #999; "|


<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Calc Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG01-IntroducingCalc.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG02-EnterEditFormatData.pdf|Chapter 2   - Enter Edit Format Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG03-ChartsAndGraphs.pdf|Chapter 3   - Charts And Graphs]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG04-StylesAndTemplates.pdf|Chapter 4   - Styles And Templates]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG05-UsingGraphicsInCalc.pdf|Chapter 5   - Using Graphics In Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG06-PrintingExportingEmailing.pdf|Chapter 6   - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG07-FormulasAndFunctions.pdf|Chapter 7   - Formulas And Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG08-PivotTable.pdf|Chapter 8   - Pivot Table]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG09-DataAnalysis.pdf|Chapter 9   - Data Analysis]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG10-LinkingCalcData.pdf|Chapter 10 - Linking Calc Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG11-SharingAndReviewing.pdf|Chapter 11 - Sharing And Reviewing]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG12-CalcMacro.pdf|Chapter 12 - Calc Macro]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG13-CalcAsASimpleDatabase.pdf|Chapter 13 - Calc As A Simple Database]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG14-CustomizingCalc.pdf|Chapter 14 - Customizing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG15-KeyboardShortcuts.pdf|Chapter 15 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG16-CalcFunctions.pdf|Chapter 16 - Calc Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG17-CalcErrorCodes.pdf|Chapter 17 - Calc Error Codes]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Draw Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG01-IntroducingDraw.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Draw]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG02-DrawingBasicShapes.pdf|Chapter 2   - Drawing Basic Shapes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG03-WorkingWithObjects.pdf|Chapter 3   - Working with Objects and Object Points]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG04-ChangingObjectAttributes.pdf|Chapter 4   - Changing Object Attributes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG05-CombiningMultipleObjects.pdf|Chapter 5   - Combining Multiple Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG06-EditingPictures.pdf|Chapter 6   - Editing Pictures (Raster Graphics)]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG07-3DObjects.pdf|Chapter 7   - Working with 3D Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG08-TipsAndTricks.pdf|Chapter 8   - Tips and Tricks]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG09-FlowDiagramsOrgCharts.pdf|Chapter 9   - Organization Charts, Flow Diagrams, and More]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG10-AdvancedDrawTechniques.pdf|Chapter 10 - Advanced Draw Techniques]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Impress Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG01-IntroducingImpress.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG02-SlideMastersStylesTemplates.pdf|Chapter 2   - Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG03-AddFormatText.pdf|Chapter 3   - Adding And Formatting Text]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG04-AddFormatPictures.pdf|Chapter 4   - Adding And Formatting Pictures]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG05-ManageGraphicObjects.pdf|Chapter 5   - Managing Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG06-FormatGraphicObjects.pdf|Chapter 6   - Formatting Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG07-SpreadsheetsChartsObjects.pdf|Chapter 7   - Including Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG08-SlidesNotesHandouts.pdf|Chapter 8   - Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, and Handouts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG09-SlideShows.pdf|Chapter 9   - SlideShows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG10-PrintEmailExportSave.pdf|Chapter 10 - Printing, e-mailing, exporting and saving slideshows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG11-CustomizingImpress.pdf|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG12-KeyboardShortcuts.pdf|Chapter 12 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
</div>
|} 
{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:PDF]]

Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1 User Guide Chapters

2026-06-21T11:44:21Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:{{AOo}} 4.1 User Guides (PDF)}}

The {{AOo}} 4.1 guides are presented in chapters for easy use.

{{Note|These Guides are in process and will be added here as they become available}}

Editable files (.odt) are available from [https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT this page].
----

{|style="border: 0px solid #666;" cellpadding=3 cellspacing=8 align=center

|-valign=top
|width=45% |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Getting Started Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS.pdf|Full Book]] - 2023-06-05 — (Jun 05)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS1.pdf|Preface]] - 2023-05-04 — May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS2.pdf|Chapter 1 - Introducing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS3.pdf|Chapter 2 - Styles and Templates]] — 2023-05-04 - (Apr 27)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS4.pdf|Chapter 3 - Getting Started with Writer]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS5.pdf|Chapter 4 - Getting Started with Calc]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS6.pdf|Chapter 5 - Getting Started with Impress]]— 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS7.pdf|Chapter 6 - Getting Started with Draw]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS8.pdf|Chapter 7 - Getting Started with Base]] — 2023-05-04 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS9.pdf|Chapter 8 - Getting Started with Math]] — 2023-05-05 - (May 04)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS10.pdf|Chapter 9 - Printing, Exporting, and E-mailing]] — 2023-04-27 - (Apr 27)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS11.pdf|Chapter 10 - Graphics, the Gallery, and Fontworks]] — 2022-12-30 - (Dec 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41GS12.pdf|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Apache OpenOffice]] — 2022-12-30 - (Dec 30)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Writer Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-06-17 (Jun 17)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG1-IntroducingWriter.pdf|Chapter 1 - Introducing Writer]] — 2023-07-31 (Jul 31)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG2-SettingUpWriter.pdf|Chapter 2 - Setting Up Writer]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG3-WorkingWithText.pdf|Chapter 3 - Working with Text]] — 2023-11-10 (Nov 10)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG4-FormattingPages.pdf|Chapter 4 - Formatting Pages]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG5-PrintingExportingEmailing.pdf|Chapter 5 - Printing, Exporting, Emailing]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG6-IntroductionToStyles.pdf|Chapter 6 - Introduction to Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG7-WorkingWithStyles.pdf|Chapter 7 - Working with Styles]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG8-WorkingWithGraphics.pdf|Chapter 8 - Working with Graphics]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG9-WorkingWithTables.pdf|Chapter 9 - Working with Tables]] — 2025-06-21 (Jun 21)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG10-WorkingWithTemplatesInWriter.pdf|Chapter 10 - Working with Templates in Writer]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG11-UsingMailMerge.pdf|Chapter 11 - Using Mail Merge]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG12-TOCsIndexesBiblios.pdf|Chapter 12 - Tables of Contents, Indexes, and Bibliographies]] — 2025-06-24 (Jun 24)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG13-WorkingWithMasterDocument.pdf|Chapter 13 - Working with Master Documents]] — 2025-07-07 (Jul 7)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG14-WorkingWithFields.pdf|Chapter 14 - Working with Fields]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG15-UsingFormsInWriter.pdf|Chapter 15 - Using Forms in Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41WG16-CustomizingWriter.pdf|Chapter 16 - Customizing Writer]] — 2025-07-14 (Jul 14)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Math Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41MG01.pdf|Math Guide]] — 2026-03-16 (March 16)


|width="45%" style="border-right: 1px dotted #999;border-left: 1px dotted #999; "|


<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Calc Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG01-IntroducingCalc.pdf|Chapter 1 - Introducing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG02-EnterEditFormatData.pdf|Chapter 2 - Enter Edit Format Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG03-ChartsAndGraphs.pdf|Chapter 3 - Charts And Graphs]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG04-StylesAndTemplates.pdf|Chapter 4 - Styles And Templates]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG05-UsingGraphicsInCalc.pdf|Chapter 5 - Using Graphics In Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG06-PrintingExportingEmailing.pdf|Chapter 6 - Printing Exporting Emailing]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG07-FormulasAndFunctions.pdf|Chapter 7 - Formulas And Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG08-PivotTable.pdf|Chapter 8 - Pivot Table]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG09-DataAnalysis.pdf|Chapter 9 - Data Analysis]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG10-LinkingCalcData.pdf|Chapter 10 - Linking Calc Data]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG11-SharingAndReviewing.pdf|Chapter 11 - Sharing And Reviewing]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG12-CalcMacro.pdf|Chapter 12 - Calc Macro]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG13-CalcAsASimpleDatabase.pdf|Chapter 13 - Calc As A Simple Database]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG14-CustomizingCalc.pdf|Chapter 14 - Customizing Calc]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG15-KeyboardShortcuts.pdf|Chapter 15 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG16-CalcFunctions.pdf|Chapter 16 -Calc Functions]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41CG17-CalcErrorCodes.pdf|Chapter 17 - Calc Error Codes]] — 2025-09-02 (September, 2)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Draw Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG01-IntroducingDraw.pdf|Chapter 1 - Introducing Draw]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG02-DrawingBasicShapes.pdf|Chapter 2 - Drawing Basic Shapes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG03-WorkingWithObjects.pdf|Chapter 3 - Working with Objects and Object Points]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG04-ChangingObjectAttributes.pdf|Chapter 4 - Changing Object Attributes]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG05-CombiningMultipleObjects.pdf|Chapter 5 - Combining Multiple Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG06-EditingPictures.pdf|Chapter 6 - Editing Pictures (Raster Graphics)]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG07-3DObjects.pdf|Chapter 7 - Working with 3D Objects]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG08-TipsAndTricks.pdf|Chapter 8 - Tips and Tricks]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG09-FlowDiagramsOrgCharts.pdf|Chapter 9 - Organization Charts, Flow Diagrams, and More]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41DG10-AdvancedDrawTechniques.pdf|Chapter 10 - Advanced Draw Techniques]] — 2025-12-20 (December 20)
</div>

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">Impress Guide - V4.1</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">

* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG.pdf|Full Book]] - 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG01-IntroducingImpress.pdf|Chapter 1   - Introducing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG02-SlideMastersStylesTemplates.pdf|Chapter 2   - Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG03-AddFormatText.pdf|Chapter 3   - Adding And Formatting Text]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG04-AddFormatPictures.pdf|Chapter 4   - Adding And Formatting Pictures]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG05-ManageGraphicObjects.pdf|Chapter 5   - Managing Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG06-FormatGraphicObjects.pdf|Chapter 6   - Formatting Graphic Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG07-SpreadsheetsChartsObjects.pdf|Chapter 7   - Including Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG08-SlidesNotesHandouts.pdf|Chapter 8   - Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, and Handouts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG09-SlideShows.pdf|Chapter 9   - SlideShows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG10-PrintEmailExportSave.pdf|Chapter 10 - Printing, e-mailing, exporting and saving slideshows]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG11-CustomizingImpress.pdf|Chapter 11 - Setting Up and Customizing Impress]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
* {{PDF}}[[Media:AOO41IG12-KeyboardShortcuts.pdf|Chapter 12 - Keyboard Shortcuts]] — 2025-10-30 (October, 30)
</div>
|} 
{{CCBY}}
[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:PDF]]

NL/Documentation

2026-06-10T09:01:53Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:De Apache OpenOffice Documentatie-project wiki - NL}}
{{DocBanner}}
__NOTOC__

{|
|-
| Dit project maakt en onderhoudt documentatie in de Nederlandse taal voor {{AOo}}. Documentatie kan bestaan uit gebruikersgidsen, [[NL/Documentation/FAQ|FAQ's]], [[NL/Documentation/How_Tos|How To's]], voorbeelden, gebruikerssjablonen, help voor de toepassing en trainingsmaterialen. Het project [https://www.openoffice.org/documentation/ heeft ook een thuispagina op het web].

Dit is een wiki, dus het staat u vrij om documentatie voor {{AOo}} bij te dragen!

Kijk [[:Category:Documentation/NeedsRework|hier om een lijst met pagina's te zien die uw hulp kunnen gebruiken]]!

Als u niet kunt vinden wat u zoekt, kijk dan eens op het [https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/ Apache OpenOffice gebruikersforum].

| <div id="contrib" style="border: 1px solid rgb(140, 45, 6); margin: 0px 5px 5px; padding: 1px; float: right; width: 350px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><div style="padding: 2px; background-color: rgb(140, 45, 6); color: rgb(255, 255, 255); font-weight: bold; text-align: center;">WILT U HELPEN?</div>
{|
|-
|
*[https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/Contribute Hoe deelnemen]
*[[Documentation/OpenOffice.org needs YOU|AOO heeft U nodig!]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard/Wiki Editing Policy|Wiki bewerken]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard|Project dashboard]]
|
*[[Documentation/Wishlist|Wensenlijst documentatie]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/NeedsRework|Pagina's die hulp nodig hebben!]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/BeingEdited|Pagina's in bewerking]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/Candidate|Kandidaatpagina's]]
|}
</div>
|}

{| cellspacing="8" cellpadding="3" align="center" style="border: 0px solid rgb(102, 102, 102);"
|- valign="top"
| width="45%" colspan="2" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Zoeken/Downloaden</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*Zoek en download documenten via de [https://www.openoffice.org/documentation/ Documentatie website]
</div>
|- valign="top"
| width="45%" |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Installatiegids voor OpenOffice.org 3.x (Engels)</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*{{PDF}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.pdf|PDF]] - 06-06-2010 (6 juni) - 470 kb
*{{OOoLogo}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.odt|ODT]] - 06-06-2010 (6 juni) - 300 kb
</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">
[[NL/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides|Gebruikersgidsen voor Apache OpenOffice 4.x]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[https://openoffice-uni.org/ Apache OpenOffice 4.1 Writer for Students in Arabisch, Chinees, Duits, Engels, Frans en Nederlands]
*[[Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1_User_Guide_Chapters|PDF's van Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT|ODT's van Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]

*[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides#Apache OpenOffice 4.1|Apache OpenOffice 4.1 in wiki-indeling]] (Engels)

</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">
[[NL/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides|Gebruikersgidsen voor OpenOffice.org 3.x]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[NL/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Getting Started | Beginnen met OpenOffice.org 3.x]]

</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[Documentation/OOoAuthors_User_Manual|Gebruikersgidsen voor OpenOffice.org 2.x]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Getting Started | Getting Started with OpenOffice.org]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Writer Guide | Text Documents with OpenOffice.org Writer]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Calc Guide | Spreadsheets with OpenOffice.org Calc]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Impress Guide | Presentations with OpenOffice.org Impress]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Draw Guide | Drawings with OpenOffice.org Draw]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Base Guide | Databases with OpenOffice.org Base]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Migration Guide | Migrating to OpenOffice.org]]
</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[NL/Documentation/FAQ|Vaak gestelde vragen (FAQ's)]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
{{Documentation/Message|
We zijn momenteel de FAQ's aan het reconstrueren om alle vragen naar afzonderlijke bestanden
te verplaatsen om de toegang daartoe eenvoudiger te maken}}
* [[NL/Documentation/FAQ/Algemeen|Algemene vragen]]
* [[NL/Documentation/FAQ/Installatie|OpenOffice.org installeren]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Writer|Werken met tekstdocumenten (Writer)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Calc|Werken met werkbladen (Calc)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Draw|Werken met tekeningen (Draw)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Impress|Werken met presentaties (Impress)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Formula|Werken met formules (Math)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Databases|Werken met databases (Base)]]
* [[NL/Documentation/FAQ/Macros|Macro's]]
</div>
| width="45%" style="border-left: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153); border-right: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153);" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Gidsen voor ontwikkelaars/SysAdmin</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Administration Guide|Administratieve gids]]
*[[NL/Documentation/BASIC Guide|BASIC Programmeursgids]]
*[[Documentation/Building_Guide_AOO|Building Guide AOO]]
*[[Documentation/DevGuide/OpenOffice.org Developers Guide|Gids voor ontwikkelaars]]
</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Wiki Books|Download deze gidsen als PDF / ODT (Engelstalig)]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/Reference|Verwijzingslijsten]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Reference/Math commands|Syntaxis voor formules in Math]]
*[[NL/Documentation/How_Tos/Calc:_Functies_gesorteerd_per_categorie|Werkbladfuncties in Calc]]
*[[NL/Documentation/How_Tos/Reguliere_expressies_in_Writer|Syntaxis voor reguliere uitdrukkingen in Writer]]
*[[Documentation/Reference/Bibtex-Bibliography Mappings|Bibtex-Bibliography_Mappings]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[Documentation/How Tos|How To's]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Installatie]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Tekstdocumenten]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Databases]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Presentaties]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Werkbladen]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[Documentation/Tutorials|Handleidingen/Screencasts (Engelstalig)]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Dennis Daniels' handleidingen]]
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Carlo Daffara's handleidingen]]
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Dai's handleidingen]]
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Horst Jens' handleidingen]]
*[https://documentation.openoffice.org/conceptualguide/index.html OpenOffice.org Conceptual Guides]
*[[Documentation/Using XForms|Using XForms and the OpenDocument format in OpenOffice.org and StarOffice]]
*[http://plan-b-for-openoffice.org Plan-B For OpenOffice.org Tutorials]
*[http://easy10seconds.com/How-To-Video/OpenOffice.org Easy10Seconds Tutorials]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Vergoedingen voor documentatie</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Bounties|Documentation Bounties for Developer documentation]]
</div>
|}

{{Documentation/Hook}} {{PDL1}}

[[Category:Documentation]] [[Category:Project]]
{{Documentation/Languages}}

NL/Documentation

2026-06-10T09:00:54Z

DiGro: Undo revision 267450 by DiGro (talk)

{{DISPLAYTITLE:De Apache OpenOffice Documentatie-project wiki - NL}}
{{DocBanner}}
__NOTOC__

{|
|-
| Dit project maakt en onderhoudt documentatie in de Nederlandse taal voor {{AOo}}. Documentatie kan bestaan uit gebruikersgidsen, [[NL/Documentation/FAQ|FAQ's]], [[NL/Documentation/How_Tos|How To's]], voorbeelden, gebruikerssjablonen, help voor de toepassing en trainingsmaterialen. Het project [https://www.openoffice.org/documentation/ heeft ook een thuispagina op het web].

Dit is een wiki, dus het staat u vrij om documentatie voor {{AOo}} bij te dragen!

Kijk [[:Category:Documentation/NeedsRework|hier om een lijst met pagina's te zien die uw hulp kunnen gebruiken]]!

Als u niet kunt vinden wat u zoekt, kijk dan eens op het [https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/ Apache OpenOffice gebruikersforum].

| <div id="contrib" style="border: 1px solid rgb(140, 45, 6); margin: 0px 5px 5px; padding: 1px; float: right; width: 350px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><div style="padding: 2px; background-color: rgb(140, 45, 6); color: rgb(255, 255, 255); font-weight: bold; text-align: center;">WILT U HELPEN?</div>
{|
|-
|
*[https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/Contribute Hoe deelnemen]
*[[Documentation/OpenOffice.org needs YOU|AOO heeft U nodig!]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard/Wiki Editing Policy|Wiki bewerken]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard|Project dashboard]]
|
*[[Documentation/Wishlist|Wensenlijst documentatie]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/NeedsRework|Pagina's die hulp nodig hebben!]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/BeingEdited|Pagina's in bewerking]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/Candidate|Kandidaatpagina's]]
|}
</div>
|}

{| cellspacing="8" cellpadding="3" align="center" style="border: 0px solid rgb(102, 102, 102);"
|- valign="top"
| width="45%" colspan="2" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Wat is er nieuw (Engelstalig)</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
* Januari 2021 [https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Debian_Installation Quick Installation Guide 4.1.8 - gebaseerd op Debian]
* November 2013 - {{AOo}} [[Documentation/UserGuide/Migration_Guide|Migration Guide]] is bijgewerkt en ontwikkeling is gestart voor een [[Documentation/Migration_Guide_ALV2|nieuwe versie]]
* Januari 2013 - Apache OpenOffice [[Documentation/UserGuide|Gebruikersgidsen]] zijn in ontwikkeling.
|- valign="top"
| width="45%" colspan="2" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Zoeken/Downloaden</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*Zoek en download documenten via de [https://www.openoffice.org/documentation/ Documentatie website]
</div>
|- valign="top"
| width="45%" |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Installatiegids voor OpenOffice.org 3.x (Engels)</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*{{PDF}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.pdf|PDF]] - 06-06-2010 (6 juni) - 470 kb
*{{OOoLogo}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.odt|ODT]] - 06-06-2010 (6 juni) - 300 kb
</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">
[[NL/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides|Gebruikersgidsen voor Apache OpenOffice 4.x]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[https://openoffice-uni.org/ Apache OpenOffice 4.1 Writer for Students in Arabisch, Chinees, Duits, Engels, Frans en Nederlands]
*[[Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1_User_Guide_Chapters|PDF's van Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT|ODT's van Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]

*[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides#Apache OpenOffice 4.1|Apache OpenOffice 4.1 in wiki-indeling]] (Engels)

</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">
[[NL/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides|Gebruikersgidsen voor OpenOffice.org 3.x]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[NL/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Getting Started | Beginnen met OpenOffice.org 3.x]]

</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[Documentation/OOoAuthors_User_Manual|Gebruikersgidsen voor OpenOffice.org 2.x]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Getting Started | Getting Started with OpenOffice.org]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Writer Guide | Text Documents with OpenOffice.org Writer]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Calc Guide | Spreadsheets with OpenOffice.org Calc]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Impress Guide | Presentations with OpenOffice.org Impress]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Draw Guide | Drawings with OpenOffice.org Draw]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Base Guide | Databases with OpenOffice.org Base]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Migration Guide | Migrating to OpenOffice.org]]
</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[NL/Documentation/FAQ|Vaak gestelde vragen (FAQ's)]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
{{Documentation/Message|
We zijn momenteel de FAQ's aan het reconstrueren om alle vragen naar afzonderlijke bestanden
te verplaatsen om de toegang daartoe eenvoudiger te maken}}
* [[NL/Documentation/FAQ/Algemeen|Algemene vragen]]
* [[NL/Documentation/FAQ/Installatie|OpenOffice.org installeren]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Writer|Werken met tekstdocumenten (Writer)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Calc|Werken met werkbladen (Calc)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Draw|Werken met tekeningen (Draw)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Impress|Werken met presentaties (Impress)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Formula|Werken met formules (Math)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Databases|Werken met databases (Base)]]
* [[NL/Documentation/FAQ/Macros|Macro's]]
</div>
| width="45%" style="border-left: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153); border-right: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153);" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Gidsen voor ontwikkelaars/SysAdmin</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Administration Guide|Administratieve gids]]
*[[NL/Documentation/BASIC Guide|BASIC Programmeursgids]]
*[[Documentation/Building_Guide_AOO|Building Guide AOO]]
*[[Documentation/DevGuide/OpenOffice.org Developers Guide|Gids voor ontwikkelaars]]
</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Wiki Books|Download deze gidsen als PDF / ODT (Engelstalig)]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/Reference|Verwijzingslijsten]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Reference/Math commands|Syntaxis voor formules in Math]]
*[[NL/Documentation/How_Tos/Calc:_Functies_gesorteerd_per_categorie|Werkbladfuncties in Calc]]
*[[NL/Documentation/How_Tos/Reguliere_expressies_in_Writer|Syntaxis voor reguliere uitdrukkingen in Writer]]
*[[Documentation/Reference/Bibtex-Bibliography Mappings|Bibtex-Bibliography_Mappings]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[Documentation/How Tos|How To's]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Installatie]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Tekstdocumenten]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Databases]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Presentaties]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Werkbladen]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[Documentation/Tutorials|Handleidingen/Screencasts (Engelstalig)]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Dennis Daniels' handleidingen]]
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Carlo Daffara's handleidingen]]
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Dai's handleidingen]]
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Horst Jens' handleidingen]]
*[https://documentation.openoffice.org/conceptualguide/index.html OpenOffice.org Conceptual Guides]
*[[Documentation/Using XForms|Using XForms and the OpenDocument format in OpenOffice.org and StarOffice]]
*[http://plan-b-for-openoffice.org Plan-B For OpenOffice.org Tutorials]
*[http://easy10seconds.com/How-To-Video/OpenOffice.org Easy10Seconds Tutorials]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Vergoedingen voor documentatie</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Bounties|Documentation Bounties for Developer documentation]]
</div>
|}

{{Documentation/Hook}} {{PDL1}}

[[Category:Documentation]] [[Category:Project]]
{{Documentation/Languages}}

NL/Documentation

2026-06-10T08:59:32Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:De Apache OpenOffice Documentatie-project wiki - NL}}
{{DocBanner}}
__NOTOC__

{|
|-
| Dit project maakt en onderhoudt documentatie in de Nederlandse taal voor {{AOo}}. Documentatie kan bestaan uit gebruikersgidsen, [[NL/Documentation/FAQ|FAQ's]], [[NL/Documentation/How_Tos|How To's]], voorbeelden, gebruikerssjablonen, help voor de toepassing en trainingsmaterialen. Het project [https://www.openoffice.org/documentation/ heeft ook een thuispagina op het web].

Dit is een wiki, dus het staat u vrij om documentatie voor {{AOo}} bij te dragen!

Kijk [[:Category:Documentation/NeedsRework|hier om een lijst met pagina's te zien die uw hulp kunnen gebruiken]]!

Als u niet kunt vinden wat u zoekt, kijk dan eens op het [https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/ Apache OpenOffice gebruikersforum].

| <div id="contrib" style="border: 1px solid rgb(140, 45, 6); margin: 0px 5px 5px; padding: 1px; float: right; width: 350px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><div style="padding: 2px; background-color: rgb(140, 45, 6); color: rgb(255, 255, 255); font-weight: bold; text-align: center;">WILT U HELPEN?</div>
{|
|-
|
*[https://wiki.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation/Contribute Hoe deelnemen]
*[[Documentation/OpenOffice.org needs YOU|AOO heeft U nodig!]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard/Wiki Editing Policy|Wiki bewerken]]
*[[Documentation/Dashboard|Project dashboard]]
|
*[[Documentation/Wishlist|Wensenlijst documentatie]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/NeedsRework|Pagina's die hulp nodig hebben!]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/BeingEdited|Pagina's in bewerking]]
*[[:Category:Documentation/Candidate|Kandidaatpagina's]]
|}
</div>
|}

|- valign="top"
| width="45%" colspan="2" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Zoeken/Downloaden</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*Zoek en download documenten via de [https://www.openoffice.org/documentation/ Documentatie website]
</div>
|- valign="top"
| width="45%" |
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Installatiegids voor OpenOffice.org 3.x (Engels)</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*{{PDF}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.pdf|PDF]] - 06-06-2010 (6 juni) - 470 kb
*{{OOoLogo}}[[Media:Installation_Guide_OOo3.odt|ODT]] - 06-06-2010 (6 juni) - 300 kb
</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">
[[NL/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides|Gebruikersgidsen voor Apache OpenOffice 4.x]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[https://openoffice-uni.org/ Apache OpenOffice 4.1 Writer for Students in Arabisch, Chinees, Duits, Engels, Frans en Nederlands]
*[[Documentation/AOO4 User Guides/AOO4.1_User_Guide_Chapters|PDF's van Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]
*[[Documentation/AOO4_User_Guides/AOO4.1_Chapters_ODT|ODT's van Apache OpenOffice 4.1 User Guides]]

*[[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides#Apache OpenOffice 4.1|Apache OpenOffice 4.1 in wiki-indeling]] (Engels)

</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">
[[NL/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides|Gebruikersgidsen voor OpenOffice.org 3.x]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[NL/Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Getting Started | Beginnen met OpenOffice.org 3.x]]

</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[Documentation/OOoAuthors_User_Manual|Gebruikersgidsen voor OpenOffice.org 2.x]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Getting Started | Getting Started with OpenOffice.org]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Writer Guide | Text Documents with OpenOffice.org Writer]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Calc Guide | Spreadsheets with OpenOffice.org Calc]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Impress Guide | Presentations with OpenOffice.org Impress]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Draw Guide | Drawings with OpenOffice.org Draw]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Base Guide | Databases with OpenOffice.org Base]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual/Migration Guide | Migrating to OpenOffice.org]]
</div><div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[NL/Documentation/FAQ|Vaak gestelde vragen (FAQ's)]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
{{Documentation/Message|
We zijn momenteel de FAQ's aan het reconstrueren om alle vragen naar afzonderlijke bestanden
te verplaatsen om de toegang daartoe eenvoudiger te maken}}
* [[NL/Documentation/FAQ/Algemeen|Algemene vragen]]
* [[NL/Documentation/FAQ/Installatie|OpenOffice.org installeren]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Writer|Werken met tekstdocumenten (Writer)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Calc|Werken met werkbladen (Calc)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Draw|Werken met tekeningen (Draw)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Impress|Werken met presentaties (Impress)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Formula|Werken met formules (Math)]]
* [[Documentation/FAQ/Databases|Werken met databases (Base)]]
* [[NL/Documentation/FAQ/Macros|Macro's]]
</div>
| width="45%" style="border-left: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153); border-right: 1px dotted rgb(153, 153, 153);" | <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Gidsen voor ontwikkelaars/SysAdmin</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Administration Guide|Administratieve gids]]
*[[NL/Documentation/BASIC Guide|BASIC Programmeursgids]]
*[[Documentation/Building_Guide_AOO|Building Guide AOO]]
*[[Documentation/DevGuide/OpenOffice.org Developers Guide|Gids voor ontwikkelaars]]
</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Wiki Books|Download deze gidsen als PDF / ODT (Engelstalig)]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">[[Documentation/Reference|Verwijzingslijsten]]</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Reference/Math commands|Syntaxis voor formules in Math]]
*[[NL/Documentation/How_Tos/Calc:_Functies_gesorteerd_per_categorie|Werkbladfuncties in Calc]]
*[[NL/Documentation/How_Tos/Reguliere_expressies_in_Writer|Syntaxis voor reguliere uitdrukkingen in Writer]]
*[[Documentation/Reference/Bibtex-Bibliography Mappings|Bibtex-Bibliography_Mappings]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[Documentation/How Tos|How To's]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Installatie]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Tekstdocumenten]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Databases]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Presentaties]]
* [[NL/Documentation/How Tos|Werkbladen]]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">[[Documentation/Tutorials|Handleidingen/Screencasts (Engelstalig)]]</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Dennis Daniels' handleidingen]]
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Carlo Daffara's handleidingen]]
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Dai's handleidingen]]
* [[Documentation/Tutorials|Horst Jens' handleidingen]]
*[https://documentation.openoffice.org/conceptualguide/index.html OpenOffice.org Conceptual Guides]
*[[Documentation/Using XForms|Using XForms and the OpenDocument format in OpenOffice.org and StarOffice]]
*[http://plan-b-for-openoffice.org Plan-B For OpenOffice.org Tutorials]
*[http://easy10seconds.com/How-To-Video/OpenOffice.org Easy10Seconds Tutorials]
</div> <div style="padding: 5px; font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold; background-color: rgb(205, 219, 246);">Vergoedingen voor documentatie</div> <div style="border: 1px solid rgb(205, 219, 246); margin-bottom: 15px;">
*[[Documentation/Bounties|Documentation Bounties for Developer documentation]]
</div>
|}

{{Documentation/Hook}} {{PDL1}}

[[Category:Documentation]] [[Category:Project]]
{{Documentation/Languages}}

Playing with Window Toolkit AWT

2026-06-09T08:35:23Z

DiGro:

{{NeedsRework|EN}}
{{Note|This chapter is old : written long before discovering the new Dialog for components in [[Documentation/DevGuide/WritingUNO/Accessing_Dialogs|Developer's Guide]]. At the moment I have only managed such [[Component_and_Dialog|Dialogs in components]] but I hope to work and see if it is not possible to use them in binaries executable.}}
==Danny Brewer's Explanations==
There are two different things here. Actually three.
# Dialogs
# AWT
# Forms

Forms are much higher level than the other two.

Of the first two, Dialogs are something using the UnoDialogControl and its model. You can also create AWT windows with controls.

AWT windows are modeless, and are not tied to any other window.

AWT windows are not the same thing as dialogs.

Generally, dialogs are operated modally by calling execute() on the dialog.

I have also had some success with operating dialogs modelessly. Just unhide the dialog, and it can be used modelessly. One drawback is that the modeless dialog seems to be tied to some concept of a "parent" window. I'm not sure, but I think that tends to be whatever window was in front when you created the dialog. So for example, you could create a modeless dialog that allows you to work with your document, but that modeless dialog's behavior appears to be tied to that document. Bring the modeless dialog to the front, and its document also comes to the front.

==The MessageBox Windows==
The starting code is roughly the same as previously (examples/DevelopersGuide/ProfUNO/CppBinding/). We examine also the “<OpenOffice.org1.1_SDK>/examples/DevelopersGuide/Components/Addons/ProtocolHandlerAddon_cpp” example where we find a MessageBox window. The corresponding code is given here (see also <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XWindowPeer</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XMessageBox</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.frame.XFrame</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XToolkit</idl> interfaces and <idl>com.sun.star.awt.WindowDescriptor</idl> structure and <idl>com.sun.star.awt.WindowAttribute</idl> constants ) :
<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
//Listing 1 MessageBox Windows (deprecated)
// C++
// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/awt/WindowDescriptor.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.awt.WindowDescriptor \" in the makefile
// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/awt/WindowAttribute.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.awt.WindowAttribute \" in the makefile
// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/awt/XWindowPeer.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.awt.XWindowPeer \" in the makefile
// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/awt/XMessageBox.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.awt.XMessageBox \" in the makefile

/**
* Show a message box with the UNO based toolkit
*/
static void ShowMessageBox( const Reference< XToolkit >& rToolkit,
const Reference< XFrame >& rFrame, const OUString& aTitle, const OUString& aMsgText )
{
if ( rFrame.is() && rToolkit.is() )
{
// describe window properties.
WindowDescriptor aDescriptor;
aDescriptor.Type = WindowClass_MODALTOP;
aDescriptor.WindowServiceName = OUString( RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM( "infobox" ));
aDescriptor.ParentIndex = -1;
aDescriptor.Parent = Reference< XWindowPeer >
( rFrame->getContainerWindow(), UNO_QUERY );
aDescriptor.Bounds = Rectangle(300,200,300,200);
aDescriptor.WindowAttributes = WindowAttribute::BORDER |
WindowAttribute::MOVEABLE | WindowAttribute::CLOSEABLE;

Reference< XWindowPeer > xPeer = rToolkit->createWindow( aDescriptor );
if ( xPeer.is() )
{
Reference< XMessageBox > xMsgBox( xPeer, UNO_QUERY );
if ( xMsgBox.is() )
{
xMsgBox->setCaptionText( aTitle );
xMsgBox->setMessageText( aMsgText );
xMsgBox->execute();
}
}
}
}
</syntaxhighlight>

Similar script in [[Python|PyUNO]] from the Python Samples included in <openoffice.org version>/share/Scripts/python/MsgBox.py:
<syntaxhighlight lang="python">
from com.sun.star.awt import Rectangle
from com.sun.star.awt import WindowDescriptor

from com.sun.star.awt.WindowClass import MODALTOP
from com.sun.star.awt.VclWindowPeerAttribute import OK, OK_CANCEL, YES_NO, YES_NO_CANCEL, \
RETRY_CANCEL, DEF_OK, DEF_CANCEL, DEF_RETRY, DEF_YES, DEF_NO

def TestMessageBox():
doc = XSCRIPTCONTEXT.getDocument()
parentwin = doc.CurrentController.Frame.ContainerWindow

s = "This is a test"
t = "Test"
res = MessageBox(parentwin, s, t, "querybox", YES_NO_CANCEL + DEF_NO)

s = res
MessageBox(parentwin, s, t, "infobox")

# Show a message box with the UNO based toolkit
def MessageBox(ParentWin, MsgText, MsgTitle, MsgType="messbox", MsgButtons=OK):

MsgType = MsgType.lower()

#available msg types
MsgTypes = ("messbox", "infobox", "errorbox", "warningbox", "querybox")

if MsgType not in MsgTypes:
MsgType = "messbox"

#describe window properties.
aDescriptor = WindowDescriptor()
aDescriptor.Type = MODALTOP
aDescriptor.WindowServiceName = MsgType
aDescriptor.ParentIndex = -1
aDescriptor.Parent = ParentWin
#aDescriptor.Bounds = Rectangle()
aDescriptor.WindowAttributes = MsgButtons

tk = ParentWin.getToolkit()
msgbox = tk.createWindow(aDescriptor)

msgbox.setMessageText(MsgText)
if MsgTitle :
msgbox.setCaptionText(MsgTitle)

return msgbox.execute()

g_exportedScripts = TestMessageBox,
</syntaxhighlight>

To understand the WindowAttribute::BORDER and other constants, we first have a look at the IDL file “WindowAttribute.idl” describing the windows' attributes (<idl>com.sun.star.awt.WindowAttribute</idl>) :
<syntaxhighlight lang="idl">
//Listing 2 WindowAttribute IDL File
// IDL
module com { module sun { module star { module awt {
constants WindowAttribute
{
const long SHOW = 1;
const long FULLSIZE = 2;
const long OPTIMUMSIZE = 4;
const long MINSIZE = 8;
const long BORDER = 16;
const long SIZEABLE = 32;
const long MOVEABLE = 64;
const long CLOSEABLE = 128;
const long SYSTEMDEPENDENT = 256;
};
}; }; }; };
</syntaxhighlight>
We have a look at <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XMessageBox</idl> IDL file :
<syntaxhighlight lang="idl">
//Listing 3 XMessageBox Interface : IDL File
// IDL
module com { module sun { module star { module awt {
/** gives access to a message box.
@deprecated
*/
interface XMessageBox: com::sun::star::uno::XInterface
{
[oneway] void setCaptionText( [in] string aText );
string getCaptionText();
[oneway] void setMessageText( [in] string aText );
string getMessageText();
short execute();
};
}; }; }; };
</syntaxhighlight>
where we learn this interface is deprecated.
We give now a complete main in a listing to learn how to use the previous ShowMessageBox procedure :
<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
//Listing 4 Complete Program showing a Message Box Window
//C++
int main( ) {
//retrieve an instance of the remote service manager
Reference< XMultiServiceFactory > rOfficeServiceManager;
rOfficeServiceManager = ooConnect();
if( rOfficeServiceManager.is() ){
printf( "Connected sucessfully to the office\n" );
}

//get the desktop service using createInstance returns an XInterface type
Reference< XInterface > Desktop = rOfficeServiceManager->createInstance(
OUString::createFromAscii( "com.sun.star.frame.Desktop" ));

//query for the XComponentLoader interface
Reference< XComponentLoader > rComponentLoader (Desktop, UNO_QUERY);
if( rComponentLoader.is() ){
printf( "XComponentloader successfully instanciated\n" );
}
// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/awt/XToolkit.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.awt.XToolkit \" in the makefile
// Query the XTollkit Interface
Reference< XToolkit >rToolkit = Reference< XToolkit >
( rOfficeServiceManager->createInstance(
OUString( RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM(
"com.sun.star.awt.Toolkit" ))), UNO_QUERY );

if (rToolkit.is()) {
printf ("OK...\n");
} else printf("Toolkit Error\n");

Reference< XDesktop > rDesktop(Desktop,UNO_QUERY);
Reference< XFrame > rFrame=rDesktop->getCurrentFrame();
if (rFrame.is()) printf("rFrame ... OK\n"); else printf("rFrame Error\n");

ShowMessageBox( rToolkit, rFrame,OUString::createFromAscii("Hello") ,
OUString::createFromAscii("Your First Message\n OK ?") );

return 0;
}
</syntaxhighlight>
(See also <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XToolkit</idl> interface and <idl>com.sun.star.awt.Toolkit</idl> service).
We can draw three important things from this code :
*the way we can use such an IDL file (given above) [[SDKCppLanguage#To_go_further_:_the_Constant_Type_Problem|with constants in C++]] : it's not the first time we encounter this kind of IDL file,
*the way we can access an interface through a service with a createInstance and UNO_QUERY simultaneously (see how do we obtain rToolkit)
*we see also how we obtain a frame from a <idl>com.sun.star.frame.Desktop</idl> service.
We will present later a Desktop Helper using this message box code. (See [[Constructing_Helpers#Desktop_Helper_with_message_box|here]])

==A very simple Window==
We give now a listing to construct a very simple windows using UNO toolkit (See also <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XToolkit</idl> , <idl>com.sun.star.frame.XFrame</idl> and <idl>com.sun.star.frame.XDesktop</idl> interfaces) :
<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
//Listing 5 Constructing a simple Window
// C++
main( ) {
Reference< XMultiServiceFactory > rOfficeServiceManager;
rOfficeServiceManager = ooConnect();

if( rOfficeServiceManager.is() ){
printf( "Connected sucessfully to the office\n" );
}

//get the desktop service using createInstance returns an XInterface type
Reference< XInterface > Desktop = rOfficeServiceManager->createInstance(
OUString::createFromAscii( "com.sun.star.frame.Desktop" ));

//query for the XComponentLoader interface
Reference< XComponentLoader > rComponentLoader (Desktop, UNO_QUERY);
if( rComponentLoader.is() ){
printf( "XComponentloader successfully instanciated\n" );

}

// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/awt/XToolkit.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.awt.XToolkit \" in the makefile
// Query the XTollkit Interface
Reference< XToolkit >rToolkit = Reference< XToolkit >( rOfficeServiceManager->createInstance(
OUString( RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM(
"com.sun.star.awt.Toolkit" ))), UNO_QUERY );

if (rToolkit.is()) {
printf ("OK...\n");
} else printf("Toolkit Error\n");

Reference< XDesktop > rDesktop(Desktop,UNO_QUERY);

// *** essai fenetre
if ( rToolkit.is() )
{
// describe window properties.
WindowDescriptor aDescriptor;
aDescriptor.Type = WindowClass_TOP;
aDescriptor.WindowServiceName = OUString( RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM(""));
aDescriptor.ParentIndex = -1;
aDescriptor.Parent = rToolkit->getDesktopWindow();
aDescriptor.Bounds = Rectangle(100,200,300,400);
aDescriptor.WindowAttributes = WindowAttribute::BORDER | WindowAttribute::MOVEABLE | WindowAttribute::SHOW | WindowAttribute::CLOSEABLE
| WindowAttribute::SIZEABLE;
Reference< XWindowPeer > xWindowPeer = rToolkit->createWindow( aDescriptor );
Reference< XWindow > xWindow(xWindowPeer,UNO_QUERY);
xWindowPeer->setBackground(0xFF00FF);

// At this point, if you stop the program, you will have a new OOo window on the screen,
//but you cannot do anything with it. You cannot even close it!
// create a new frame
Reference< XFrame > xFrame =Reference< XFrame >( rOfficeServiceManager->createInstance(
OUString( RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM(
"com.sun.star.frame.Frame" ))), UNO_QUERY );
xFrame->initialize(xWindow);
Reference < XFramesSupplier > xFramesSupplier(Desktop,UNO_QUERY);
xFrame->setCreator(xFramesSupplier);
xFrame->setName(OUString::createFromAscii("Window 1"));
getchar();
}
return 0;
}
</syntaxhighlight>

==The file picker dialog==
We want provide a dialog box for searching a file and returning its name. We start from a Bernard Marcelly's book example. When working with file picker dialog, we are concerned with three IDL files. Here is the first one (<idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilePicker</idl>) :
<syntaxhighlight lang="idl">
//Listing 6 XFilePicker Interface : IDL File
// IDL
module com { module sun { module star { module ui { module dialogs {
interface XFilePicker: com::sun::star::ui::dialogs::XExecutableDialog
{
void setMultiSelectionMode( [in] boolean bMode );
void setDefaultName( [in] string aName );
void setDisplayDirectory( [in] string aDirectory )
raises( ::com::sun::star::lang::IllegalArgumentException );
string getDisplayDirectory();
sequence< string > getFiles();
};
}; }; }; }; };
</syntaxhighlight>
The beginning of this file indicates we are concerned with <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XExecutableDialog</idl> too because of inheritance :
<syntaxhighlight lang="idl">
//Listing 7 XExecutableDialog Interface : IDL File
// IDL
module com { module sun { module star { module ui { module dialogs {
interface XExecutableDialog: com::sun::star::uno::XInterface
{
void setTitle( [in] string aTitle );
short execute();
};
}; }; }; }; };
</syntaxhighlight>
and what is more difficult to see is we are also concerned with <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.ExecutableDialogresults</idl> [[SDKCppLanguage#To_go_further_:_the_Constant_Type_Problem|IDL constants]]:
<syntaxhighlight lang="idl">
//Listing 8 ExecutableDialogresults values : IDL File
// IDL
module com { module sun { module star { module ui { module dialogs {
constants ExecutableDialogResults
{
const short CANCEL = 0;
const short OK = 1;
};
}; }; }; }; };
</syntaxhighlight>
The way to obtain the FilePicker dialog can be explained as follow. First you have to obtain a <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilePicker</idl> interface. After we use a setDisplayDirectory for an example, then execute the dialog box and finally get the first of chosen files.
<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
//Listing 9 a File Picker Dialog
// LINUX C++ (Only the file path is LINUX-like)
// based on Bernard Marcelly's Example (Book p512)
// Don't forget #include <osl/file.hxx>
OUString sDocUrl;
osl::FileBase::getFileURLFromSystemPath(
OUString::createFromAscii("/home/smoutou/"),sDocUrl);

// Don't forget to add : using namespace com::sun::star::ui::dialogs;
// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/ui/dialogs/XFilePicker.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilePicker \" in the makefile
// Query the XFilePicker interface

Reference< XFilePicker > rFilePicker = Reference< XFilePicker >
( rOfficeServiceManager->createInstance(
OUString( RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM(
"com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker" ))), UNO_QUERY );

rFilePicker->setDisplayDirectory( sDocUrl);
short result=rFilePicker->execute();

// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/ui/dialogs/ExecutableDialogResults.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.ExecutableDialogResults \" in the makefile
if (result == ExecutableDialogResults::OK)
ShowMessageBox( rToolkit, rFrame,OUString::createFromAscii("Result") ,
rFilePicker->getFiles()[0] );
</syntaxhighlight>
It is possible to modify the filter names with the <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilterManager</idl> interface. Here is the corresponding IDL file :
<syntaxhighlight lang="idl">
//Listing 10 XFilterManager Interface : IDL File
// IDL
module com { module sun { module star { module ui { module dialogs {
interface XFilterManager: com::sun::star::uno::XInterface
{
void appendFilter( [in] string aTitle, [in] string aFilter )
raises( ::com::sun::star::lang::IllegalArgumentException );
void setCurrentFilter( [in] string aTitle )
raises( ::com::sun::star::lang::IllegalArgumentException );
string getCurrentFilter( );
};
}; }; }; }; };
</syntaxhighlight>
and now a C++ example which use this interface :
<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
//Listing 11 Using the File Picker
// LINUX C++
// Don't forget #include <osl/file.hxx>
OUString sDocUrl;
osl::FileBase::getFileURLFromSystemPath(
OUString::createFromAscii("/home/smoutou/"),sDocUrl);
// Don't forget to add : using namespace com::sun::star::ui::dialogs;
// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/ui/dialogs/XFilePicker.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilePicker \" in the makefile
// Reference< XFilePicker > rFilePicker(rDesktop,UNO_QUERY);
Reference< XFilePicker > rFilePicker = Reference< XFilePicker >
( rOfficeServiceManager->createInstance(
OUString( RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM(
"com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker" ))), UNO_QUERY );

rFilePicker->setDisplayDirectory( sDocUrl);

// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/ui/dialogs/XFilterManager.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilterManager \" in the makefile
Reference< XFilterManager > rFilterManager (rFilePicker, UNO_QUERY);
rFilterManager->appendFilter(OUString::createFromAscii("Texts"),
OUString::createFromAscii("*.txt"));
rFilterManager->appendFilter(OUString::createFromAscii("Docs OpenOffice"),
OUString::createFromAscii("*.sxw;*.sxc"));
rFilterManager->setCurrentFilter(OUString::createFromAscii("Docs OpenOffice"));
short result=rFilePicker->execute();

// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/ui/dialogs/ExecutableDialogResults.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.ExecutableDialogResults \" in the makefile
if (result == ExecutableDialogResults::OK)
ShowMessageBox( rToolkit, rFrame,OUString::createFromAscii("Result") ,
rFilePicker->getFiles()[0] );
</syntaxhighlight>
See also <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilePicker</idl> and <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilterManager</idl> interfaces and <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.ExecutableDialogResults</idl> constants.

It's time to show how to construct a save as Dialog.

==Save as Dialog==
We again start from a Bernard Marcelly's example. Our problem is to translate these OOoBasic lines :
<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
'Listing 12 Save Dialog
REM ***** BASIC *****
FP=CreateUnoService("com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker")
Dim FPtype(0) As Integer
FPtype(0)=com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.TemplateDescription.FILESAVE_SIMPLE
With FP
.initialize(FPtype())
....
End With
</syntaxhighlight>
particularly the « initialize » method.
At first, we look for the constant to transform the previous FilePicker dialog. The constants are defined in the <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.TemplateDescription</idl> file as descibed below ([[SDKCppLanguage#To_go_further_:_the_Constant_Type_Problem|see how to use UNO constants with C++]]) :
<syntaxhighlight lang="idl">
//Listing 13 TemplateDescription Constants : IDL File
// IDL
module com { module sun { module star { module ui { module dialogs {
constants TemplateDescription
{
const short FILEOPEN_SIMPLE = 0;
const short FILESAVE_SIMPLE = 1;
const short FILESAVE_AUTOEXTENSION_PASSWORD = 2;
const short FILESAVE_AUTOEXTENSION_PASSWORD_FILTEROPTIONS = 3;
const short FILESAVE_AUTOEXTENSION_SELECTION = 4;
const short FILESAVE_AUTOEXTENSION_TEMPLATE = 5;
const short FILEOPEN_LINK_PREVIEW_IMAGE_TEMPLATE = 6;
const short FILEOPEN_PLAY = 7;
const short FILEOPEN_READONLY_VERSION = 8;
const short FILEOPEN_LINK_PREVIEW = 9;
const short FILESAVE_AUTOEXTENSION = 10;
};
}; }; }; }; };
</syntaxhighlight>
Looking for initialize method, we have a look in <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker</idl> service :
<syntaxhighlight lang="idl">
//Listing 14 FilePiker service : IDL File
// IDL
module com { module sun { module star { module ui { module dialogs {
interface XFilePicker;
interface XFilePickerNotifier;
interface XFilePickerControlAccess;
interface XFilterManager;
interface XFilePreview;
interface XFilterGroupManager;

service FilePicker
{
[optional, property] string HelpURL;
interface XFilePicker;
interface XFilePickerNotifier;
interface XFilterManager;
[optional] interface XFilePreview;
[optional] interface XFilePickerControlAccess;
[optional] interface XFilterGroupManager;
[optional] interface com::sun::star::lang::XInitialization;
[optional] interface com::sun::star::util::XCancellable;
interface com::sun::star::lang::XComponent;
interface com::sun::star::lang::XServiceInfo;
interface com::sun::star::lang::XTypeProvider;
};
}; }; }; }; };
</syntaxhighlight>
where you see an <idl>com.sun.star.lang.XInitialization</idl> interface. Therefore we give the XInitialization.idl file :
<syntaxhighlight lang="idl">
//Listing 15 XInitialisation Interface : IDL File
// IDL
module com { module sun { module star { module lang {
interface XInitialization: com::sun::star::uno::XInterface
{
void initialize( [in] sequence<any> aArguments )
raises( com::sun::star::uno::Exception );

};
}; }; }; };
</syntaxhighlight>
It's OK, we get it. We see we have to pass an any sequence to the initialize procedure. It's time to write the C++ corresponding code.
<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
//Listing 16 Invoking the Save Dialog
// LINUX C++
// inspired by Bernard Marcelly's Example p515
// Don't forget #include <osl/file.hxx>
OUString sDocUrl;
osl::FileBase::getFileURLFromSystemPath(
OUString::createFromAscii("/home/smoutou/"),sDocUrl);
// Don't forget to add : using namespace com::sun::star::ui::dialogs;
// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/ui/dialogs/XFilePicker.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilePicker \" in the makefile
// Reference< XFilePicker > rFilePicker(rDesktop,UNO_QUERY);
Reference< XFilePicker > rFilePicker = Reference< XFilePicker >
( rOfficeServiceManager->createInstance(
OUString( RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM(
"com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker" ))), UNO_QUERY );

rFilePicker->setDisplayDirectory( sDocUrl);

// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/ui/dialogs/XFilterManager.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilterManager \" in the makefile
Reference< XFilterManager > rFilterManager (rFilePicker, UNO_QUERY);

// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/lang/XInitialization.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.lang.XInitialization \" in the makefile
Reference< XInitialization > rInitialize (rFilePicker, UNO_QUERY);
Sequence < Any > info(1);

// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/ui/dialogs/TemplateDescription.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.TemplateDescription \" in the makefile
info[0] <<= (short) TemplateDescription::FILESAVE_SIMPLE;
rInitialize-> initialize(info);

rFilterManager->appendFilter(OUString::createFromAscii("Texts"),
OUString::createFromAscii("*.txt"));
rFilterManager->appendFilter(OUString::createFromAscii("Docs OpenOffice"),
OUString::createFromAscii("*.sxw;*.sxc"));
rFilterManager->setCurrentFilter(OUString::createFromAscii("Docs OpenOffice"));
short result=rFilePicker->execute();

// Don't forget to add : #include <com/sun/star/ui/dialogs/ExecutableDialogResults.hpp>
// Don't forget to add "com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.ExecutableDialogResults \" in the makefile
if (result == ExecutableDialogResults::OK)
ShowMessageBox( rToolkit, rFrame,OUString::createFromAscii("Result") ,
rFilePicker->getFiles()[0] );
</syntaxhighlight>
This code uses <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilePicker</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XFilterManager</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.lang.XInitialization</idl> interfaces and <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.ExecutableDialogResults</idl> UNO constants.

We are interesting now with generalising our previous work with Dialog Box.

== Run Time Dialog Box ==
Read also [[Documentation/DevGuide/Basic/Creating_Dialogs_at_Runtime|Developer's Guide]] and [[Documentation/BASIC_Guide/Dialogs|OOoBasic and Dialogs]].

After the previous examples inspired by Bernard Marcelly's book, it's time to start with an example inspired from Andrew Pitonyak's book. OOoBasic is particulary difficult to translate in these situations. We then choose to start from a Java example in :
<OpenOffice.org1.1_SDK>/examples/DevelopersGuide/BasicAndDialogs/CreatingDialogs
with the file SampleDialog.java
For this example we use [[CppSDKAuthors|GAP's]] helper provided [[Constructing_Helpers#The_GAP.27s_Helper|here]].
{{Note|Dialogs tackled in this section are runtime dialogs. Since recent evolution of OpenOffice, it is possible to run OOoBasic Dialog (I mean conceived with Basic IDE) with all programming language. But the [[Documentation/DevGuide/WritingUNO/Using_Dialogs_in_Components|only SDK's examples available]] are for components and in Java, and at the moment, I have no time to explore if it is possible with C++ automation examples and in C++.}}

We give now the complete code. Because it's a lot of code you have to look at <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XActionListener</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XControlContainer</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.lang.XMultiServiceFactory</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.uno.XInterface</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.frame.XComponentLoader</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.uno.XComponentContext</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.lang.XMultiComponentFactory</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.beans.XPropertySet</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.container.XNameContainer</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XButton</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XToolkit</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.awt.XWindow</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.XDialog</idl> interfaces, and <idl>com.sun.star.awt.ActionEvent</idl> event, and also <idl>com.sun.star.frame.Desktop</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.awt.UnoControlDialogModel</idl>, <idl>com.sun.star.awt.UnoControlButtonModel</idl> services) :
<syntaxhighlight lang="cpp">
//Listing 17 Our first Run Time Dialog Box
// C++ (GAP example)
#include "SimpleOOConnection.cpp"
...
// First an event listener for the Button
// Don't forget the #include <cppuhelper/implbase1.hxx>
typedef ::cppu::WeakImplHelper1< ::com::sun::star::awt::XActionListener > ActionListenerHelper;
/** action listener
*/
class ActionListenerImpl : public ActionListenerHelper
{
private :
int _nCounts;
Reference< XControlContainer > _xControlCont;
//XControlContainer _xControlCont;

public :
ActionListenerImpl(const Reference< XControlContainer >& xControlCont) {
_xControlCont = xControlCont;
_nCounts = 0;
}

// XEventListener
virtual void SAL_CALL disposing (const com::sun::star::lang::EventObject& aEventObj )
throw(::com::sun::star::uno::RuntimeException) {
// _xControlCont = NULL;
cout << "object listened to will be disposed"<<endl;
}

// XActionListener
virtual void SAL_CALL actionPerformed (const ::com::sun::star::awt::ActionEvent& rEvent )
throw ( RuntimeException) {
// increase click counter
_nCounts++;
cout << "OK : " << _nCounts << endl;
}
};

int main()
{
SimpleOOConnection sOOConnection1;

//instantiating connection to Remote Service Manager
Reference< XMultiServiceFactory > xRemoteServiceManager=sOOConnection1.connect_ooffice
("uno:socket,host=localhost,port=8100;urp;StarOffice.ServiceManager");
//checks whether getting Remote Service Manager or Not
if(!xRemoteServiceManager.is())
{
cout<<"Error in connection"<<endl;
return 1;
}

// setting Desktop reference to desktop
Reference< XInterface > desktop =xRemoteServiceManager->createInstance
(OUString::createFromAscii("com.sun.star.frame.Desktop" ));

// Query for the XUnoUrlResolver interface for loading Desktop
Reference< XComponentLoader > xComponentLoader( desktop, UNO_QUERY );

//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Any any;
sal_Int32 value;

Reference< XComponentContext > xComponentContext =
defaultBootstrap_InitialComponentContext();

// retrieve the servicemanager from the context
Reference< XMultiComponentFactory > xMultiComponentFactory =
xComponentContext->getServiceManager();
/************************************************************************************
Reference<XInterface> dialogModel = xMultiComponentFactory->createInstanceWithContext(
OUString::createFromAscii("com.sun.star.awt.UnoControlDialogModel"),
xComponentContext );
************************************************************************************/
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

Reference<XInterface> dialogModel = xRemoteServiceManager->createInstance
(OUString::createFromAscii("com.sun.star.awt.UnoControlDialogModel"));
cout<<"hi"<<endl;

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

Reference< XPropertySet >xPSetDialog(dialogModel,UNO_QUERY );

value=150;
any<<=value;
xPSetDialog->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("PositionX"), any );
xPSetDialog->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("PositionY"), any );
xPSetDialog->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("Width"), any );
xPSetDialog->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("Height"), any );
any<<=OUString::createFromAscii( "Runtime Dialog Demo" );
xPSetDialog->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("Title"), any );

Reference<XMultiServiceFactory> xMultiServiceFactory(dialogModel,UNO_QUERY );

Reference< XInterface > buttonModel = xMultiServiceFactory->createInstance
(OUString::createFromAscii("com.sun.star.awt.UnoControlButtonModel") );

Reference< XPropertySet >xPSetButton(buttonModel,UNO_QUERY );

value=20;
any<<=value;
xPSetButton->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("PositionX"), any );

value=70;
any<<=value;
xPSetButton->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("PositionY"), any );
value=50;
any<<=value;
xPSetButton->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("Width"), any );
value=14;
any<<=value;
xPSetButton->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("Height"), any );
any<<=OUString::createFromAscii("Button1");
xPSetButton->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("Name"), any );
value=1;
any<<=value;

//xPSetButton->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("TabIndex"), any );
any<<=OUString::createFromAscii( "Click Me" );

xPSetButton->setPropertyValue( OUString::createFromAscii("Label"), any );

// insert the control models into the dialog model
Reference< XNameContainer >xNameCont(dialogModel,UNO_QUERY );
any<<=buttonModel;

xNameCont->insertByName( OUString::createFromAscii("Button1"), any );

// create the dialog control and set the model
Reference<XInterface> dialog = xRemoteServiceManager->createInstance(
OUString::createFromAscii("com.sun.star.awt.UnoControlDialog"));

Reference<XControl> xControl(dialog,UNO_QUERY );
Reference<XControlModel >xControlModel(dialogModel,UNO_QUERY );
xControl->setModel( xControlModel );

// add an action listener to the button control
Reference< XControlContainer >xControlCont(dialog ,UNO_QUERY );
Reference< XInterface > objectButton = xControlCont->getControl(
OUString::createFromAscii("Button1") );
Reference< XButton >xButton(objectButton ,UNO_QUERY);

ActionListenerImpl *xListener = new ActionListenerImpl( xControlCont );
Reference< XActionListener > xActionListener =
static_cast< XActionListener* > ( xListener );

xButton->addActionListener( xActionListener );

// create a peer
Reference<XInterface> toolkit = xRemoteServiceManager->createInstance(
OUString::createFromAscii("com.sun.star.awt.ExtToolkit"));
Reference< XToolkit >xToolkit(toolkit , UNO_QUERY );

Reference< XWindow >xWindow(xControl , UNO_QUERY );
xWindow->setVisible( true );
xControl->createPeer( xToolkit,'\0' );//create instance of XWindowPeer

// execute the dialog
Reference< XDialog >xDialog(dialog , UNO_QUERY );
xDialog->execute();

// dispose the dialog
Reference< XComponent > xComponent(dialog,UNO_QUERY );
xComponent->dispose();

/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

return 0;
}
</syntaxhighlight>
This code will print out :
<pre>
hi
OK : 1
OK : 2
OK : 3
OK : 4
OK : 5
OK : 6
OK : 7
OK : 8
object listened to will be disposed
</pre>
When clicking on the button it increment and prints out the new value.
From this code any tips to manage a dialog box can be hired :
# create a dialog model service, dialogModel variable in the above code
# query a XPropertySet interface to set any properties (x y positions, size, title, ..)
# create all controls with the same previous both rules : query a control model first, and then query a XPropertySet interface to set any properties
# query a XNameContainer from the dialog model
# insert every control model into the dialog model with this container
# create the dialog control and query first aXControl interface and second a XControlModedl interface to set the model
# add action listener if needed
# after creating a peer run the dialog

== Complete Translation of a Java example ==

{{:First Dialog}}

== Text Control example ==
We want now to construct a more complex [[dialog_box_with_an_edit_control|dialog box with a text control]].

== List Box example ==
We want now to construct a [[dialog_box_with_an_List_Box|dialog box with a list box]].

== Radio button example ==

We want now to construct a [[dialog_box_with_an_Radio_Button|dialog box with a radio button]].

== TO DO ==

[http://api.openoffice.org/docs/DevelopersGuide/Components/Components.xhtml Developer's Guide] states it is possible to construct a component with a dialog that have been created with the Dialog Editor integrated in the OpenOffice.org Basic IDE. I think the same is possible with a binary executable and I have to work around this subject.

{{Template:Home_Page}}

=See also=
* [[Documentation/DevGuide/Basic/Creating_Dialogs_at_Runtime|Creating Dialogs at Runtime]] in Developer's Guide
* [[Framework/Article/Easy_To_Use_Message_Boxes|Easy To Use Message Boxes]] in OOoBasic
* [[Documentation/BASIC_Guide/Dialogs|OOoBasic and Dialogs]]
* [[Uno/Cpp/Tutorials/Introduction_to_Cpp_Uno|C++ and UNO tutorial]]
*[[Tutorial_UNO_Library|UNO tutorial]]
*[[Tutorial_UNO_IDL|UNO IDL]]
* [[Uno/Article/Types%26Reflection]]
* [[Framework/Tutorial/Popup_Menu_Controller|Popup Menu Controller]] and C++
* [[Framework/Tutorial/Statusbar_Controller|Statusbar Controller]] and C++
* [[Treecontrol|The New Tree Contol]]
* [[Framework/Article/Generic_UNO_Interfaces_for_complex_toolbar_controls|Generic UNO Interfaces for complex toolbar controls]]
* Writing a Program to Control OpenOffice.org, by Franco Pingiori — [http://www.linuxjournal.com/article/8550 Part 1] and [http://www.linuxjournal.com/article/8608 Part 2], Linux Journal

[[Category:Cpp]]
[[Category:Uno]]
[[Category:Tutorial]]

NO/Documentation/BASIC Guide/Arrays

2026-06-09T08:30:35Z

DiGro:

{{NO/Documentation/BASICGuideTOC/v2
|ShowPrevNext=block
|ShowPrevPage=block
|PrevPage=NO/Documentation/BASIC Guide/Date
|NextPage=NO/Documentation/BASIC Guide/Scope of Variables
|lang=block
}}
{{DISPLAYTITLE:Tabeller}}
__NOTOC__
Tabeller lar en samle likense ting under samme navn, for eksempel hundre kundenummer,
der hvert er av typen Integer. De enkleste er en-dimensjonale med en kolonne og
et visst antall rader. Vil en ha to tabeller med 100 rader deklareres de
eksplisitt med
<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim kundenummer(99) as Integer
Dim kundenavn(99)
kundenummer(14) = 354
kundenavn(14) = "Jon Jonsen"
</syntaxhighlight>
Av eksemplet ser en
*uten datatype (som for kundenavn) blir datatypen variant (vil variere etter hvordan den brukes).
*antallet plasser i tabellen indikeres innenfor parentesene: 0 er et "lower bound" og 99 er "upper bound", tilsammen 100 plasser.
*hver plass i tabellen indekseres med sin posisjon: indeks 14 er den 15. plassen
Vil en ha andre yttergrenser (lower og upper bound) angis det innenfor parentesene:
<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim oppsummering(1940 To 1945) As String
Dim surhetsgrad(-10 To -5) As Double
</syntaxhighlight>
Begge tabellene vil ha seks plasser indeksert som
oppsummering(1940), oppsummering(1941) ... oppsummering(1945).
Den andre indekseres som
surhetsgrad(-10), surhetsgrad(-9) ... surhetsgrad(-5).

En spesiell form for tabell er UNO-sekvenser (lister, samlinger) som brukes innen
{{OOo}} API. Disse starter alltid med 0. Mer om disse (viktige) tabellene senere.

Hvis nederste grense (lower bound) ikke oppgis, blir den 0.
Noen mener at den skal starte med 1, og kan da gi direktivet
<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Option Base 1
</syntaxhighlight>
Dette er en spesialitet arvet fra VBA og anbefales ikke,
da de fleste språk starter med 0 som nederste grense.
Og, det har forvirrende effekter, som at <tt>Dim a(3)</tt>
gir en tabell med feltene a(1), a(2), a(3) og a(4)!

===Flere dimensjoner===
Skal en ha flere dimensjoner angis det innenfor parentesene i en implisitt deklarasjon, som:
<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim a(3, 5) As Integer
Dim c(7,14,99) As Boolean
</syntaxhighlight>
som for tabell "a" gir 4 rader (indeksert 0 til 3) og
6 kolonner (indeksert 0 til 5), tilsammen 24 data av typen Integer.
Tabell "c" har 8*15*100 boolske data = 1200 boolske data som
opptar 1200*2 = 2400 byte i minnet.

===Redimensjonering===
Vil en endre plassen brukes ReDim. En ny tabell med tilstrekkelig plass,
lages et annet sted i minnet,
og (hvis en angir Preserve) blir det gamle innholdet kopiert dit (kan ta noe tid).
<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim a(7) as Integer
Dim skatt(200) as Double
...
ReDim a(10) As String ' utvidelse (ny type, intet preserveres)
ReDim Preserve skatt(140) ' forminsking (ikke alt kan preserveres)
</syntaxhighlight>
Flerdimensjonale tabeller kan redimensjoneres likens.
Vil en preservere, kan hverken antallet dimensjoner eller datatype forandres.

===Yttergrensene===
Funksjonene LBound(a) og UBound(a) viser yttergrensene i dimensjon a (eller dimensjon 0 hvis
intet er angitt). For en tredimesjonal tabell (dimensjon 0, 1 og 2) blir dette
<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim MyArray(10, 13 to 28) As Integer
MsgBox(LBound(MyArray, 2)) ' viser 13
MsgBox(UBound(MyArray, 2)) ' viser 28
</syntaxhighlight>
===Tomme tabeller===
Vet man ikke plassbehovet lages en tom tabell som senere utvides
<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim s() As String
... finner ut at en trenger 14 plasser
Redim s(13) As String
</syntaxhighlight>
En tom tabell vil ha -1 som "upper bound" mens "lower bound" er 0.

{{InterWiki Languages BasicGuide|articletitle=NO/Documentation/BASIC Guide/Arrays}}
{{PDL1}}

IT//Documentation/BASIC Guide/Working With Variables

2026-06-09T08:28:42Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Working with Variables}}
{{Documentation/BASICGuideTOC/v2
|ShowPrevNext=block
|ShowPrevPage=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/BASIC Guide/Program Overview
|NextPage=Documentation/BASIC Guide/Strings
|lang=block
}}

==隐式变量声明 ==

Basic语言设计得非常易于使用。因此, {{OOo}} Basic允许创建一个变量使用简单,而无需进行显式声明。也就是说,一个变量存在的时刻,您将其包含在您的代码。根据变量的存在,以下示例最多可以声明三个新变量:

一个 = b+c

隐式声明变量不是一种好的编程习惯,因为它会导致而无意中引入新的变量,例如,键入错误。而不会生成错误报告,解释程序初始化键入错误,新的变量的值为0。可能很难找到,这类错误代码。

==显式变量声明 ==

要避免导致的错误隐式声明变量, {{OOo}} Basic提供了一切换:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Option Explicit
</syntaxhighlight>

此值必须是列在中的第一个程序行每个模块,并确保则发出错误报告,如果某个变量没有声明就使用。 " <tt>Option Explicit</tt> 切换应该包含所有基本模块。

最简单的形式,命令的显式声明一个变量,如下所示:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim MyVar
</syntaxhighlight>

此示例声明一个变量,其名称 <tt>MyVar</tt> 和类型 <tt>variant</tt>。变体是一种通用变量,可以记录所有可能的值,包括字串、整数、浮点数和布尔值。下面的几个示例变体变量:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
MyVar = "Hello World" ' Assignment of a string
MyVar = 1 ' Assignment of a whole number
MyVar = 1.0 ' Assignment of a floating point number
MyVar = True ' Assignment of a Boolean value
</syntaxhighlight>

中声明的变量前一个示例甚至可以使用不同的变量类型在相同的程序。尽管这会提供很大的灵活性,但最好将一个变量限于一种变量类型。当 {{OOo}} Basic会遇到一个错误地定义的变量类型的一个特定上下文中,一个错误消息的生成方式。

使用以下样式时,请键入-绑定变量声明:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim MyVar As Integer ' Declaration of a variable of the integer type
</syntaxhighlight>

该变量被声明为整数类型,可以记录整数值。您也可以使用以下样式来声明整数类型的变量:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim MyVar% ' Declaration of a variable of the integer type
</syntaxhighlight>

Dim指令可以记录多个变量声明:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim MyVar1, MyVar2
</syntaxhighlight>

如果要将变量指定成某种类型,就必须进行单独指定对每个变量:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim MyVar1 As Integer, MyVar2 As Integer
</syntaxhighlight>

如果您不声明类型的变量, {{OOo}} Basic就将该变量指定为变体类型。例如,在下面的变量声明中, <tt>MyVar1</tt> 将成为一个变体, <tt>MyVar2</tt> 一个整数:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim MyVar1, MyVar2 As Integer
</syntaxhighlight>

以下各节列出了变量类型,可在 {{OOo}} Basic程序库和描述如何使用和声明。

{{InterWiki Languages BasicGuide|articletitle=文档/Basic指南</工作的变量}}
{{PDL1}}

IT//Documentation/BASIC Guide/Working With Forms

2026-06-09T08:27:26Z

DiGro:

{{Documentation/BASICGuideTOC/v2
|ShowPrevNext=block
|ShowPrevPage=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/BASIC Guide/Forms
|NextPage=Documentation/BASIC Guide/Control Element Forms
|form=block
}}
{{DISPLAYTITLE:Working with Forms}}

{{OOo}} 可能包含文字字段、列表框、单选按钮和一系列其他控制元素,可以直接插入在文字或工作表文档。表单功能工具栏用于编辑表单。

一个 {{OOo}} 表单可以采用以下两种模式:“草稿模式和显示模式。在草稿模式下,控制元素可以更改其属性可以对其进行编辑使用属性窗口。

表单功能工具栏还可用于切换模式之间。

== 确定对象表单 ==

{{OOo}} 定位控制元素的表格绘图对象级。实际的对象进行访问的表单列表在画级别。访问这些对象所示文本文档:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim Doc As Object
Dim DrawPage As Object
Dim Form As Object

Doc = StarDesktop.CurrentComponent
DrawPage = Doc.DrawPage
Form = DrawPage.Forms.GetByIndex(0)
</syntaxhighlight>

此 <tt>GetByIndex</tt> 方法将返回与表单的索引号为0。

使用工作表,中间阶段所需的工作表级别,因为绘图并不直接位于文档,但在各个工作表:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim Doc As Object
Dim Sheet As Object
Dim DrawPage As Object
Dim Form As Object

Doc = StarDesktop.CurrentComponent
Sheet = Doc.Sheets.GetByIndex(0)
DrawPage = Sheet.DrawPage
Form = DrawPage.Forms.GetByIndex(0)
</syntaxhighlight>

为已建议的 <tt>GetByIndex</tt> 方法名称、文档可以含有多个表单。这非常有用,例如,如果不同数据库的内容就会显示在一个文档,或者1:n的数据库关系中显示一个表单。创建子表单,还提供了用于此目的。

== 这三个方面的控制元素表单 ==

一个控制元素表单都有三个方面:

* 该 '''模型''' 的控制元素是密钥对象的 {{OOo}} Basic程序员当使用控制元素表单。
* 与此相对应的 '''视图''' ,控制元素管理着显示信息。
* 由于控制元素表单在文档内的管理类似于一个特殊的绘图元素,还有一个 '''Shape对象''' ,用于反映该绘图元素属性控制元素(特别是它的位置和大小)。

== 访问的控制模型元素表单 ==

模型的控制元素表单可通过下列 <tt>GetByName</tt> 方法对象表单:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim Doc As Object
Dim Form As Object
Dim Ctl As Object

Doc = StarDesktop.CurrentComponent
Form = Doc.DrawPage.Forms.GetByIndex(0)
Ctl = Form.getByName("MyListBox")
</syntaxhighlight>

此示例确定了模型 <tt>MyListBox</tt> 控制元素,它位于第一种形式的文本文档当前处于打开状态。

如果您不确定的表单的控制元素,您可以将选项用于搜索所有表单的控制元素:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim Doc As Object
Dim Forms As Object
Dim Form As Object
Dim Ctl As Object
Dim I as Integer

Doc = StarDesktop.CurrentComponent
Forms = Doc.Drawpage.Forms

For I = 0 To Forms.Count - 1
Form = Forms.GetbyIndex(I)
If Form.HasByName("MyListBox") Then
Ctl = Form.GetbyName("MyListBox")
Exit Function
End If
Next I
</syntaxhighlight>

此示例使用 <tt>HasByName</tt> 方法检查所有形式的文本文档以确定它们是否包含一个控制元素模型调用 <tt>MyListBox</tt>。如果相应的模型,将执行引用这个保存在 <tt>Ctl</tt> 变量和终止搜索。

== 访问查看的控制元素表单 ==

要访问的视图控制元素表单,则需要关联模型。 "视图控制元素,可以将协助确定的模型使用文档控制器。

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim Doc As Object
Dim DocCrl As Object
Dim Forms As Object
Dim Form As Object
Dim Ctl As Object
Dim CtlView As Object
Dim I as Integer

Doc = StarDesktop.CurrentComponent
DocCrl = Doc.getCurrentController()
Forms = Doc.Drawpage.Forms

For I = 0 To Forms.Count - 1
Form = Forms.GetbyIndex(I)
If Form.HasByName("MyListBox") Then
Ctl = Form.GetbyName("MyListBox")
CtlView = DocCrl.GetControl(Ctl)
Exit Function
End If
Next I
</syntaxhighlight>

以下代码中列出的示例是很相似的代码的用于确定控制元素模型。它使用的 <tt>Doc</tt> 文档对象,而且还将 <tt>DocCrl</tt> 文档控制器对象来引用当前文档窗口。借助此控制器对象的模型控制元素,它将使用 <tt>GetControl</tt> 方法确定了视图(<tt>CtlView</tt> 变量)控制元素表单。

== 访问的Shape对象控制元素表单 ==

方法来访问Shape对象的控制元素也使用相应绘图级文档。要确定一个特殊的控制元素,则所有绘图元素绘图级必须搜索。

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim Doc As Object
Dim Shape as Object
Dim I as integer

Doc = StarDesktop.CurrentComponent

For i = 0 to Doc.DrawPage.Count - 1
Shape = Doc.DrawPage(i)
If HasUnoInterfaces(Shape, "com.sun.star.drawing.XControlShape") Then
If Shape.Control.Name = "MyListBox" Then
Exit Function
End If
End If
Next
</syntaxhighlight>

此示例检查所有绘图元素以确定它们是否支持/所需的接口控制元素表单。如果出现这种情况,则 <tt>Control.Name</tt> 属性会接着检查的名称是否在控制元素 <tt>MyListBox</tt>。如果是,函数将结束搜索。

=== 确定与大小和位置的控制元素 ===

如前所述,该大小和位置的控制元素可以确定使用相关 <tt>shape</tt> 对象。控制元素的Shape,与所有其他 <tt>shape</tt> 对象,还提供了 <tt>Size</tt> 和 <tt>Position</tt> 属性"使此目的:

;<tt>Size (struct)</tt>:控制元素的大小(/数据结构)
;<tt>Position (struct)</tt>:控制元素的位置(/数据结构)

以下示例显示了如何使用的位置和大小的控制元素可以设置使用关联的Shape对象:

<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Dim Shape As Object
Dim Point As New com.sun.star.awt.Point
Dim Size As New com.sun.star.awt.Size

' ... Initialize Shape object, as previously shown ...

Point.x = 1000
Point.y = 1000
Size.Width = 10000
Size.Height = 10000

Shape.Size = Size
Shape.Position = Point
</syntaxhighlight>

在 <tt>shape</tt> 对象的"控制元素必须为已知的代码是在函数。如果不是这样,则它必须确定使用以上代码。

{{InterWiki Languages BasicGuide|articletitle=文档/Basic Guide/工作表单使用}}
{{PDL1}}

FR/Documentation/Dashboard/Wiki Editing Policy

2026-06-09T08:25:51Z

DiGro:

{{Warn|Le contenu de cette page est <b>obsolète</b> et mériterait une actualisation.}}
{{DocBanner}}

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Politique d'édition du wiki}}
[[en:Documentation/Dashboard/Wiki_Editing_Policy]]
Ce qui suit est la version française de [[Documentation/Dashboard/Wiki_Editing_Policy|cette page]].

Cet article est là pour vous aider à contribuer activement à la partie Documentation du wiki. Nous vous encourageons fortement à annoncer les nouvelles pages ou les changements majeurs sur la liste de documentation. Cliquez [mailto:sympa@fr.openoffice.org?Subject=subscribe%20doc ici pour vous inscrire] (aucun message nécessaire, c'est un robot), et ensuite [mailto:doc@fr.openoffice.org ici pour poster].

Vous pouvez également voir ici [http://fr.openoffice.org/contact-forums.html l'ensemble des listes].

=Prérequis pour l'Édition=

Vous devez être enregistré et connecté avant de pouvoir éditer le wiki. L'enregistrement est simple.
# Cliquez sur '''Connexion / Créer un compte''' dans le coin en haut à droite de cette page et complétez les champs requis. <br> Nous recommandons l'emploi du même nom d'utilisateur que pour le site {{OOo}}.
# Puis vous aurez à valider votre adresse email en cliquant sur le lien que vous aurez reçu.

Pour les connexions ultérieures vous partirez du même point, entrerez votre nom d'utilisateur et votre mot de passe, et cliquerez sur le bouton '''Log in'''

L'étape suivante est de vous présenter à la communauté. Il n'y a aucun dommage possible et c'est une bonne façon d'aborder confortablement le wiki.
#Quand vous êtes connecté, votre nom d'utilisateur apparaît en haut de la page, <span style="color:#9F0000"> en rouge,</span> jusqu'à ce que vous créiez votre page utilisateur. Pour ceci, cliquez sur votre nom d'utilisateur.
#Sur votre page, ajoutez les sections données ci-dessous, c'est votre profil sur le Wiki {{OOo}};
#* A propos de vous (About yourself)
#* {{OOo}} et vous (OpenOffice and you)
#* Vos contributions (Your contributions)
#* Travaux en cours (Work in progress)
#* Des projets futurs? (Any future plans?)
#* Références (optionnel) - Reference (optional)
#* Contact

Ceci est donc grossièrement un modèle de création de profil.
Vous n'êtes pas obligé de le suivre et pouvez tout à fait avoir des sections de votre choix. Cette liste est là pour constituer un modèle pour tous les nouveaux utilisateurs.

=Ajout de commentaires=
Les commentaires importants doivent être annoncés sur la liste de diffusion [mailto:doc@fr.openoffice.org doc@fr.openoffice.org] pour être certain qu'ils seront remarqués.

Pour ajouter un commentaire à une page:
# Cliquez sur l'onglet '''Discussion''' en haut de la page.
#* Si vous démarrez un nouveau sujet cliquez sur le signe '''+''' à droite de l'onglet '''edit''' en haut, remplissez la ligne de titre du sujet et inscrivez votre commentaire dans la boite principale. (in the main text box.)
#* Si vous voulez ajouter un commentaire à une discussion existante insérez le après le commentaire existant et indentez le en apposant un caractère deux points (<code>:</code>) au début de chaque paragraphe.
# Signez de votre nom d'utilisateur avec quatre caractères tildes (<code><nowiki>~~~~</nowiki></code>). Vous pouvez le faire automatiquement avec le bouton "'''Votre signature avec la date'''" ( http://wiki.services.openoffice.org/w/skins/common/images/button_sig.png ) dans la barre d'outils.
# Cliquez sur '''Publier'''. (Click '''Save Page'''.)

Pour en apprendre plus sur les commentaires reportez vous à la page [http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Talk_pages Mediawiki help about talk pages]

=Structure de la section [[FR/Documentation]] du wiki=

La section documentation n'est qu'une part de ce vaste wiki. Le projet doc.oo.o tente de présenter l'information dans cette section d'une manière facilement accessible et d'avoir une structure permettant une navigation aisée à la fois pour l'utilisateur et le contributeur.

Toutes les pages de documentation sont des sous-pages de la page de documentation principale. Une sous-structure ou sous-page présente des sections contenant d'autres sous-pages... Ayez en une vue hiérarchique, tout comme un système de fichiers (votre disque dur). Chaque sous-page est automatiquement reliée à la page principale.

NDT: J'ai adapté un tableau ici puisque le modèle de référence est native lang - anglais. En effet, il est bon de respecter l'architecture existante, dans le cas d'une traduction par exemple, ceci afin de faciliter les liens interwikis. (Voir l'onglet Discussion de cette page.)

{| class="prettytable"
!L'arborescence actuelle du wiki ressemble à ceci:
!The current wiki page tree looks like this:
|-
|wiki.services.openoffice.org/wiki
|wiki.services.openoffice.org/wiki/Documentation
|-
|
+--- ...à compléter...
+---FR/Documentation/Administration_Guide
+---FR/FAQ
+---FR/Documentation/How_Tos
+---
+---
+---
+---
+---FR/Documentation/BASIC_Guide
+---(Extensions_development_basic_fr)
+---
|
+---Dashboard
+---Administration Guide
+---FAQ
+---How Tos
+---OOoAuthors User Manual
+---Tutorials
+---Samples, Templates and Clipart
+---Setup Guide
+---BASIC Guide
+---DevGuide
+---Reference
|}

{|border=1 style="border-collapse:collapse;" cellpadding=3 cellspacing=4
|+ '''Architecture du wiki anglophone:'''
|-
!Subpage!!Description
|-
|[[Documentation/Dashboard]]
|High-level tracking of documentation sub-projects and content deliverables
|-
|[[Documentation/Administration Guide]]
|Guide that describes how to administer an OpenOffice.org network installation
|-
|[[Documentation/FAQ]]
|Collection of FAQs.
|-
|[[Documentation/How Tos]]
|Link collection of How Tos
|-
|[[Documentation/OOoAuthors User Manual]]
|Collection of User Guides from OOoAuthors
|-
|[[Documentation/Tutorials]]
|Tutorial collections from different contributors
|-
|[[Documentation/Samples, Templates and Clipart]]
|Sub-project page in order to provide usable templates for business and personal use (draft)
|-
|[[Documentation/Setup Guide]]
|Sub-project page in order to provide a guide through the setup process of OpenOffice.org (draft)
|-
|[[Documentation/BASIC Guide]]
|Guide that provides an introduction to programming with OpenOffice.org BASIC
|-
|[[Documentation/DevGuide]]
|Guide that describes how to program with OpenOffice.org using the component technology UNO (Universal Network Objects) with OpenOffice.org.
|-
|[[Documentation/Reference]]
|Collection of reference material. References on this page should show up under '''Reference Lists''' at the Documentation main page.
|}

=Création de nouvelles pages=

{{Warn | Avant de créer une page assurez vous qu'il n'y ait pas déjà une page existante avec un sujet similaire.}}

* Si la nouvelle page peut être une sous-page d'une page existante allez simplement sur la page existante et créez un lien vers la nouvelle page. Après publication de la page existante modifiée vous pouvez cliquer sur le lien et commencer à écrire votre nouvelle page.

* Si vous voulez vraiment créer une nouvelle page pour le projet Documentation, vous pouvez utiliser l'URL du wiki pour en créer une. Vous devez observer l'arborescence du wiki quand vous créez une nouvelle page de cette façon. L'URL d'une page wiki est alors quelque chose comme:<br> <tt><nowiki> http://wiki.services.openoffice.org/wiki/fr/documentation/</nowiki>''PageName''</tt>

{{Note | L'approche par URL est seulement pratique si vous liez cette page plus tard à d'autres. Autrement cette page restera cachée dans le Wiki.}}

Pour plus d'information sur les nouvelles pages, reportez vous à [http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Starting_a_new_page/fr Mediawiki help about new pages]

=Utilisation des catégories=

Les catégories assignées à une page sont généralement listées en bas de celle-ci. Cliquez sur une catégorie, et vous verrez une page relatant toutes les pages ayant été classées dans cette catégorie. De cette façon, une étiquette (tag) de catégorie dans une page vous donne l'opportunité de voir le contenu en rapport. Plus la page est grosse et plus nombreuses pourront être les étiquettes de catégories insérées.

Pour ajouter une étiquette de catégorie à une page
# Cliquez sur '''Pages spéciales''' dans la boîte à outils à gauche.
# Cliquez sur '''Catégories''' dans la liste de liens de la page spéciale.
# Choisissez un nom de catégorie sensé, et appliquez le en ajoutant <nowiki>[[Category:</nowiki>''Category Name''<nowiki>]]</nowiki> à la fin de la page.

{{Warn | Ne créez pas de catégories dupliquées pour le même sujet. Chaque catégorie doit être unique. Autrement il deviendra difficile d'utiliser les catégories pour chercher dans le wiki.}}

Reportez vous à [http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Categories MediaWiki Help:Categories] si vous voulez en savoir plus sur les catégories Wiki.

Un exemple simple d'utilisation des catégories dans les livres Wiki:
# Créez une catégorie nommée d'après le chapitre en cours.
# Ajoutez la nouvelle étiquette de catégorie à toutes les pages de ce chapitre.
# Ajoutez l'étiquette de catégorie du livre à la page de cette nouvelle catégorie.

Le lecteur peut alors voir la catégorie du livre. La catégorie du livre montre tous les chapitres du livre. Si le lecteur clique sur une catégorie de chapitre, il peut voir toutes les pages de ce chapitre (en ordre alphabétique).

N'ajoutez pas une catégorie et sa sous-catégorie à une même page wiki. Pour plus d'informations voyez la section MediaWiki Help:Category sur [http://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/Help:Category#Category_considerations Category considerations].

Vous pouvez utiliser des modèles pour ajouter une catégorie commune à un grand groupe de pages, mais ce n'est pas recommandé. On peut penser gagner du temps, mais "ajouter ou supprimer une étiquette de catégorie dans le modèle ne met pas à jour la liste des catégories des pages qui utilisent ce modèle, jusqu'à ce qu'on édite la page qui utilise ce modèle." Pour plus d'information, voyez la section MediaWiki Help:Category sur [http://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/Help:Category#Using_templates_to_populate_categories Using templates to populate categories].

=Modèles=

Consultez la page [http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Templates Templates help] si vous n'êtes pas familier avec les modèles de mediawiki.

==Ajouter un nouveau modèle de documentation==

*Si vous créez un nouveau modèle pour utilisation dans le wiki Documentation, nommez le comme une sous-page de '''FR/Documentation'''.
** Incorrect: <tt>MonModèle</tt>
** Correct: <tt>FR/Documentation/MonModèle</tt>

* Ajoutez une description sur le but et l'utilisation du modèle dans le modèle lui-même en utilisant l'élément <code><noinclude></code> comme décrit à [http://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/Help:Template#Noinclude.2C_includeonly.2C_and_onlyinclude MediaWiki help: Template].

* Ajoutez le modèle à la liste des modèles ci-dessous.

{{Spacer|30}}

==Liste des modèles de documentation existants en anglais==

This is a list of Documentation templates and their usage

{|border=1 style="border-collapse:collapse;" cellpadding=3 cellspacing=4
|-valign=top
!Template Name!!Usage!!Example
|-valign=top
|[[Template:DocBanner]]
|Puts the Documentation Project "Banner" at the top right of the page
<tt><nowiki>{{DocBanner}}</nowiki></tt>
|[[Image:Docbanner.png]]
|-valign=top
|[[Template:BeingEdited]]
|Marks a page as currently being edited to avoid conflicting changes.
Use this template when you perform larger edits on a file that may even take more than one session to finish.
Be sure to add name and date of "locking" by adding a <tt><code><nowiki>~~~~</nowiki></code></tt> as parameter:
<tt><nowiki>{{BeingEdited|EN|~~~~|1}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{BeingEdited|EN|--[[User:Sancho|А. Е. Харламенков]] ([[User talk:Sancho|talk]]) 06:45, 9 July 2018 (UTC)|1]] 17:54, 7 February 2008 (CET)}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:Warn]]
|Takes sections containing warnings, i.e. information that is potentially harmful in some way, for example, data loss.
<tt><nowiki>{{Warn|Always switch off power before opening the case.}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{Warn|Always switch off power before opening the case.}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:DraftPage]]
|Marks up pages that are in a draft state
<tt><nowiki>{{DraftPage|EN}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{DraftPage|EN}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:FromForum]]
|<tt><nowiki>{{FromForum|FR}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{FromForum|FR}}

|-valign=top
|[[Template:Bar]]
|Used to draw horizontal bars for simplistic bar charts
<tt><nowiki>{{Bar|100|10|#3333FF}}</nowiki><br>
<nowiki>{{Bar|57|10|#33FF33}}</nowiki><br>
<nowiki>{{Bar|112|10|#FF3333}}</nowiki></tt>
|
{{Bar|100|10|#3333FF}}
{{Bar|57|10|#33FF33}}
{{Bar|112|10|#FF3333}}

|-valign=top
|[[Template:HelpNeeded]]
|<tt><nowiki>{{HelpNeeded|FR|Check the spelling}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{HelpNeeded|FR|Check the spelling|1}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:Imported]]
|<tt><nowiki>{{Imported|EN|Author Name|Contributor Names}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{Imported|EN|Author Name|Contributor Names}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:Lin]]
|<tt><nowiki>{{Lin|Linux related content}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{Lin|Linux related content}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:Documentation/MasterTOC]]
|This is the master template that is used to create tables of content. For usage click the template name.
|
|-valign=top
|[[Template:NeedsRework]]
|<tt><nowiki>{{NeedsRework|EN}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{NeedsRework|EN|1}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:Note]]
|<tt><nowiki>{{Note|Notable stuff}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{Note|Notable stuff}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:OOoLogo]]
|Displays an OpenOfiice.org logo
<tt><nowiki>{{OOoLogo}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{OOoLogo}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:Old]]
|<tt><nowiki>{{Old|EN}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{Old|EN}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:PDF]]
|<tt><nowiki>{{PDF}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{PDF}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:OOo]]
|A variable for displaying the string '''OpenOffice.org'''.
<tt><nowiki>{{OOo}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{OOo}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:SeeAlso]]
|<tt><nowiki>{{SeeAlso|EN|
* [[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Getting_Started|Getting Started with OpenOffice.org 3.x]]
}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{SeeAlso|EN|
* [[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Getting_Started|Getting Started with OpenOffice.org 3.x]]
}}
|-valign=top
|[[Template:Tip]]
|Takes sections containing tips, i.e. useful non-crucial information.
<tt><nowiki>{{Tip|Right-click opens the context menu}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{Tip|Right-click opens the context menu}}
|-valign=top
|Template:Documentation/*TOC
|Several tables of content based on [[Template:Documentation/MasterTOC]] used in guides.
|See, for example, the [[Template:Documentation/BASICGuideTOC/v2|Basic Guide TOC]]
|-valign=top
|[[Template:Win]]
|<tt><nowiki>{{Win|Windows related content}}</nowiki></tt>
|{{Win|Windows related content}}
|}

==Liste des modèles de documentation existants en français==
Voir le [[FR/Wiki/Aide:Modeles |contenu de ce chapitre]].

=Contenu graphique=

Les grandes lignes directrices pour les images sont:
* Utilisez un titre unique et descriptif. le nom du fichier doit être construit d'une manière qui montre son utilisation, par exemple:
: Doc_mig_icon_data.png = Image de '''Doc'''umentation, utilisé dans le guide de '''mig'''ration, dépeignant l''''icon'''e de '''data'''base.
* Si possible, ne mettez pas à l'échelle les images que vous téléchargez. Vous pouvez utiliser la fonctionnalité MediaWiki image thumbnail pour mettre l'image à l'échelle.
* Éditez l'image si nécessaire pour vous assurer que la partie importante est claire et visible.
* Gardez à l'esprit que d'autres personnes peuvent vouloir traduire la page où vous placez une image. Essayez de ne pas inclure de superpositions ou autre texte supplémentaire à l'image.
* JPG est généralement meilleur pour les photos, SVG, pour les icônes, les logos etc., et PNG pour les captures d'écran. N'essayez pas d'utiliser BMP ou TIFF.

Avant que vous puissiez insérer votre image fin prête dans une page Wiki, vous devez la télécharger sur le serveur.
# Dans la barre latérale, section '''Boîte à outils''', cliquez sur '''Importer un fichier'''. La page de description d'image apparait.
# Utilisez la page de description d'image pour décrire l'image et ses statuts de copyright (s'il y en a).

Pour placer l'image sur la page vous pouvez utiliser la fonctionnalité MediaWiki Image thumbnail qui "contient" vos illustrations dans une boîte image. Cette boîte image contient également un point pour une légende. La syntaxe est <tt>[[Image:''image.png|thumb|position|size|Image caption'']]</tt>, où:
* thumb = Réduit l'image et la contient dans une boîte image.
* position = Position sur la page. "Rien" place l'image à gauche dans le cadre de la page sans habillage du texte. ""left" et "right" placent l'image à gauche ou à droite de la page avec un plein habillage du texte.
* size = Taille maximum en pixels pour l'image. Si l'image est plus grande que cette valeur alors elle est réduite. Si l'image est plus petite elle ne subit aucun changements.
Si vous ne déclarez pas position et size, l'image est réduite à un petit timbre poste, et par défaut du coté droite de la page avec un plein habillage du texte.

Voici un exemple utilisant <tt><nowiki>[[Image:LoadSaveOptions.png|thumb|none|500px|An example image caption]]</nowiki></tt>

[[Image:LoadSaveOptions.png|thumb|none|500px|Un exemple de légende pour cette image]]

* Comment gérer les images et la numérotation des tables? (How to handle image and table numbering?)

=Liaisons=

Bien que la fenêtre d'édition offre une assistance dans l'écriture de liens internes et externes vous pouvez regarder la page [http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Links MediaWiki help page about links] pour une meilleure compréhension du fonctionnement des liens wikis.

Il y a une autre page d'aide MediaWiki si vous avez besoin d'[http://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/Help:Wikitext_examples#Links examples].

Lors de la création de liens veuillez considérer les directives de [[Documentation/Dashboard/Help_Style_Guide#Using_Links | using links]] dans notre guide de style.

=Travaux généraux d'édition=

L'édition n'est passible qu'une fois connecté. Vous pouvez commencer par éditer la page entière après avoir cliqué sur l'onglet '''Modifier''' en haut de page. Mais généralement c'est plus pratique d'éditer des section individuelles d'une page en cliquant sur le lien '''Modifier''' à droite. Si vous effectuez des changements, veuillez considérer les règles du [[Documentation/Dashboard/Help_Style_Guide | style guide]] pour assurer un style d'écriture consistant. Cliquez sur le bouton '''Prévisualiser''' pour vérifier les changements avant de finalement '''Publier''' / sauvegarder cette page.

==Réparer du contenu inapproprié, inexact ou qui n'est plus à jour==

Le contenu qui n'est plus à jour est habituellement marqué par une des étiquettes suivantes:

{{Old|EN|1}}
{{NeedsRework|EN|1}}
Vous pouvez trouver une collection de pages avec cette dernière étiquette en cliquant sur [[:Category:NeedsRework | Pages that Need Help! ]] dans la page principale du Wiki.

Quand vous avez sélectionné une page à éditer
#Testez si les procédures décrites sont toujours valides pour la version courante de {{OOo}}.
#Connectez vous et faites les corrections nécessaires.

Ce procédé est plus aisé si vous ouvrez deux onglets dans votre navigateur, un pour lire les procédures et un pour l'édition.

Quand vous avez fini, enlevez la ou les étiquettes ci dessus, marquez la page avec l'étiquette "Vérifiée pour l'exactitude technique" (comme décrit dans la section [[#Liste_des_mod.C3.A8les_de_documentation_existants_en_fran.C3.A7ais| Modèles]] ci-dessus), et cliquez sur '''Publier'''.

==Réparer des erreurs mineures et typographiques==

Si vous détectez des erreurs mineures comme des erreurs typographiques par exemple, connectez vous et éditez l'article. Avant de cliquer sur le bouton '''Publier''' vous devez cocher la case '''Modification mineure''' juste au dessus.

==Réparer les graphiques et copies d'écran==

Pour éditer un graphique sur le Wiki, Clic de droite sur le graphique et choisissez '''Enregistrer l'image sous...'''. Quand vous avez édité le graphique sur votre ordinateur, revenez à la page Wiki, cliquez sur le graphique, et dans la page de la description de l'image choisissez '''Importer un nouvelle version de ce fichier'''.

Si vous avez créé une nouvelle version d'une copie d'écran, cliquez directement sur la copie d'écran correspondante sur le wiki et ensuite choisissez '''Importer un nouvelle version de ce fichier''' dans la page de la description de l'image.

==Réparer le style et la langue==

Les articles ayant besoin d'améliorations dans le style et le langage devraient être reconnus par les étiquettes suivantes:

{{HelpNeeded|FR|Check the spelling|1}}
{{NeedsRework|EN|1}}
Vous pouvez trouver une collection d'articles avec cette dernière étiquette si vous cliquez sur le lien [[:Category:NeedsRework | Pages that Need Help! ]] depuis la page principale du Wiki.

Pour améliorer un tel article, connectez vous, cliquez sur l'onglet d'édition et faites les corrections nécessaires. Puis retirez les étiquettes et cliquez sur '''Publier'''.

==Liens vers des pages localisées==

==Validation du contenu==

==Réparer le Spam / Supprimer des pages==

Si vous détectez du spam envoyez un mail à [mailto:dev@website.openoffice.org dev@website.openoffice.org].

Il y a aussi une [[Special:Listusers/sysop|list with Wiki Sysops]] (personnes qui peuvent supprimer des pages). Si vous voulez détruire certaines pages, vous pouvez demander à quelqu'un de cette liste, ou mieux, ajouter la syntaxe Wiki <tt><nowiki>{{delete}}</nowiki></tt> n'importe ou sur la page que vous voulez supprimer. Ceci ajoutera la page à la catégorie "Candidates for speedy deletion" ("Candidats pour suppression rapide"), et la page sera effacée par quelqu'un ayant des privilèges Sysop, ou par un robot de maintenance WikiBot.

=Travailler sur les FAQs=
Toutes les questions et réponses sont affichées ensemble sur une simple page Wiki.

Si vous voulez insérer une nouvelle entrée dans la FAQ, c'est donc une paire question / réponse correspondante:

<ol>
<li> Sélectionnez une section de la FAQ sur la page principale du Wiki Documentation. Pour Writer et Calc vous avez à sélectionner une autre sous-page jusqu'à ce que vous atteigniez la section finale de la FAQ.</li>
<li> Faites défiler vers le bas jusqu'à la zone de liste Insérer nouvelle FAQ.</li>
<li> Remplacez le texte dans la liste après le dernier slash '/' avec votre question.</li>
<li> Cliquez sur '''Ajouter nouvelle FAQ'''<br>Une nouvelle page Wiki est créée et préchargée avec un modèle pour une paire Question / Réponse: </li>

<syntaxhighlight lang="text">
{{{DISPLAYTITLE: (INSERT FAQ TITLE)}}

<section begin=question/>
<INSEREZ LA QUESTION>
<section end=question/>

<section begin=answer/>
<INSEREZ LA REPONSE>
<section end=answer/>

[[Category:Documentation/FAQ/<INSERT FAQ SECTION>]]

</syntaxhighlight>

<li> Remplacez <tt>(INSERT FAQ TITLE)</tt> avec le titre de la FAQ à afficher sur la page. Ce peut être une version courte de la question ou la question elle-même.</li>
<li> Remplacez <tt><INSERT QUESTION></tt> par la question actuelle.</li>
<li> Remplacez <tt><INSERT ANSWER></tt> par la réponse actuelle.</li>
<li> Remplacez <tt><INSERT FAQ SECTION></tt> par le nom de la section en cours dans la FAQ. Cette assignation de catégorie détermine où les pages Wiki apparaîtront. Veuillez utiliser les noms de section suivants:</li>

{|class="prettytable sortable"
|-
!FAQ section !!section name in category
|-valign=top
|General||General
|-valign=top
|Installation||Installation
|-valign=top
|Word Processing||Writer
|-valign=top
|Automatic Functions||Writer/AutomaticFunctions
|-valign=top
|Document Management||Writer/DocumentManagement
|-valign=top
|Formatting Pages and Docs||Writer/FormattingPagesAndDocuments
|-valign=top
|Formatting Text||Writer/FormattingText
|-valign=top
|Graphics, Frames & Objects||Writer/GraphicsFramesObjects
|-valign=top
|Indexes, Tables of Contents||Writer/IndexToc
|-valign=top
|Printing and Mail Merge||Writer/Printing
|-valign=top
|Spreadsheets||Calc
|-valign=top
|Drawings||Draw
|-valign=top
|Presentations||Impress
|-valign=top
|Formula Editor||Formula
|-valign=top
|Database||Databases
|-valign=top
|Macros||Macros
|}
<li>Cliquez sur '''Publier'''.</li>
</ol>

=Travailler sur les How Tos=
Si vous voulez créer un nouvel How To
# Allez à la section [[FR/Documentation/How_Tos | How Tos]] et ouvrez la fenêtre d'édition (onglet Modifier).
# Identifiez la sous-section adéquate et entrez le titre de votre How To comme un lien.
# Cliquez sur '''Publier''' pour rendre le lien visible.
# Cliquez sur le lien de votre How To et commencez à écrire en respectant les règles du [[Documentation/Dashboard/Help_Style_Guide | style guide]]. Si vous n'êtes pas sur de la façon d'implémenter le guide de styles, reportez vous à cet How To Writer [[Documentation/How_Tos/Getting_a_Picture_into_the_Gallery | Getting a Picture Into the Gallery]].

{{Note|Apposez toujours le lien de licence à la fin de votre article: Insérez seulement <tt><nowiki>{{PDL1}}</nowiki></tt>. }}

Vous pouvez également créer des How Tos en écrivant une nouvelle page comme <tt>FR/Documentation/How Tos/''Nom de la Page''</tt> avec une ou plusieurs catégories spécifiques. La page How To nouvellement créée sera alors assignée à la section How To correspondante. Les catégories disponibles pour cela sont les suivantes:
* <tt><nowiki>[[Category:FR/Documentation/How Tos/Installation]]</nowiki></tt>
* <tt><nowiki>[[Category:FR/Documentation/How Tos/Writer]]</nowiki></tt>
* <tt><nowiki>[[Category:FR/Documentation/How Tos/Impress]]</nowiki></tt>
* <tt><nowiki>[[Category:FR/Documentation/How Tos/Calc]]</nowiki></tt>
* <tt><nowiki>[[Category:FR/Documentation/How Tos/Database]]</nowiki></tt>

Si vous voulez revoir des How Tos existants, cherchez l'étiquette "Cet article a besoin d'être vérifié sur la pertinence et le style."
* Testez si les procédures décrites sont toujours valides pour la version actuelle de {{OOo}},
* Vérifiez que les règles du guide de style sont appliquées,
* Vérifiez la grammaire et les fautes d'orthographe,
Et faites les corrections nécessaires dans la fenêtre d'édition.

Quand vous avez fini, marquez la page avec l'étiquette "Vérifié pour l'exactitude technique" comme décrit dans la section [[#Liste des modèles de documentation existants en français|Modèles]] ci-dessus, et cliquez sur '''Publier'''.

N'oubliez pas de prévenir [mailto:doc@fr.openoffice.org doc@fr.openoffice.org] de votre travail sur les How Tos.

=Travailler sur les guides=
{|class="prettytable sortable"
|-
!Actuellement, les guides suivants sont disponibles sur le Wiki:
!Currently, there are the following guides on the wiki:
|-
|Liste à compléter...
|
* [[Documentation/Administration_Guide|The Administration Guide]]
* [[Documentation/BASIC_Guide|The BASIC Programming Guide]]
* [[Documentation/DevGuide/OpenOffice.org_Developers_Guide|The Developer's Guide]]
* [[Documentation/OOoAuthors_User_Manual|The User Guides for OpenOffice.org 2.x]]
* [[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides|The User Guides for OpenOffice.org 3.x]]
|}
Si vous voulez travailler sur les guides d'utilisateur pour {{OOo}} veuillez contacter le groupe des auteurs, [http://www.odfauthors.org OOoAuthors group].

De l'aide est disponible à propos de [[Documentation/DevGuide/Contributing_to_the_Developers_Guide|Contributing to the Developer's Guide]] qui peut également être pratique pour le guide d'administration et le guide du programmeur Basic.

=Localisation du contenu=
Ci-dessous quelques directives relatives aux traductions:
* Suivre la même structure que la page anglaise.
* '''Ne traduisez pas''' les noms de pages Wiki. Utilisez le modèle <tt><nowiki>{{DISPLAYTITLE:Titre de la page}}</nowiki></tt> pour localiser le nom de la page.
* Utilisez une nomenclature des sous-pages indiquant clairement le langage de la page. Par exemple, la version chinoise du guide du développeur utilise la structure de sous-page <tt>Zh/Documentation/DevGuide</tt>. La version suédoise devrait utiliser <tt>SV/Documentation/DevGuide/</tt>, et ainsi de suite.
{{Note|Si possible, essayez de toujours utiliser all-caps pour le code de caractères ISO.

(If possible, try to always use all-caps for the ISO language code.)}}
* Liez les différents langages entre eux par l'utilisation de la syntaxe des liens interwikis <tt><nowiki>[[ISO_Lang_code:Page_Title]]</nowiki></tt>. (Plus facile à réaliser avec les modèles Wiki, quand une nouvelle localisation est ajoutée)

{{PDL1}}

[[Category:FR/TableauBord]]
[[Category:Help]]
[[Category:How to]]
[[Category:Guidelines]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Using a macro as a function

2026-06-09T08:23:57Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Using a macro as a function}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch12TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Write your own functions
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Passing arguments to a macro
}}__notoc__
Using the newly created Calc document CalcTestMacros.ods, enter the formula <nowiki>=NumberFive()</nowiki>. Calc finds the macro and calls it.

[[Image:CG3Ch12F12.png|thumb|none|500px|''Use the <nowiki>NumberFive()</nowiki> Macro as a Calc function.'']]

{{Tip| Function names are not case sensitive. You can enter <nowiki>=NumberFive()</nowiki> and Calc clearly shows <nowiki>=NUMBERFIVE()</nowiki>.}}

Save the Calc document, close it, and open it again. Depending on your settings in '''Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org > Security > Macro Security''', Calc will display one of the warnings shown below. You will need to click '''Enable Macros''', or Calc will not allow any macros to be run inside the document. If you do not expect a document to contain a macro, it is safer to click '''Disable Macros''' in case the macro is a virus.

[[Image:CG3Ch12F13a.png|thumb|none|500px|''OOo warns you that a document contains macros.'']]

[[Image:CG3Ch12F14a.png|thumb|none|500px|''Warning if macros are disabled'']]

If you choose to disable macros, then when the document loads, Calc can no longer find the function.

[[Image:CG3Ch12F14.png|thumb|none|500px|''The function is gone.'']]

When a document is created and saved, it automatically contains a library named Standard. The Standard library is automatically loaded when the document is opened. No other library is automatically loaded.

Calc does not contain a function named <nowiki>NumberFive()</nowiki>, so it checks all opened and visible macro libraries for the function. Libraries in ''OpenOffice.org Macros'', ''My Macros'', and the Calc document are checked for an appropriately named function. The <nowiki>NumberFive()</nowiki> function is stored in the AuthorsCalcMacros library, which is not automatically loaded when the document is opened.

Use '''Tools > Macros > Organize Macros > OpenOffice.org Basic''' to open the OpenOffice.org Basic Macros dialog shown further down the page. Expand CalcTestMacros and find AuthorsCalcMacros. The icon for a loaded library is a different color from the icon for a library that is not loaded.

Click the expansion symbol (usually a plus or a triangle) next to AuthorsCalcMacros to load the library. The icon changes color to indicate that the library is now loaded. Click '''Close''' to close the dialog.

Unfortunately, the cells containing =NumberFive() are in error. Calc does not recalculate cells in error unless you edit them or somehow change them. The usual solution is to store macros used as functions in the Standard library. If the macro is large or if there are many macros, a stub with the desired name is stored in the Standard library. The stub macro loads the library containing the implementation and then calls the implementation.

<ol>
<li>Use '''Tools > Macros > Organize Macros > OpenOffice.org Basic''' to open the OpenOffice.org Basic Macros dialog. Select the NumberFive macro and click '''Edit''' to open the macro for editing.</li>

[[Image:CG3Ch12F16a.png|thumb|none|500px|''Select a macro and click Edit.'']]

<li>Change the name of NumberFive to NumberFive_Implementation (see Listing 3).</li>

''Listing 3. Change the name of NumberFive to NumberFive_Implementation''

<syntaxhighlight lang=oobas>
Function NumberFive_Implementation()
NumberFive_Implementation() = 5
End Function
</syntaxhighlight>

<li>In the [[Media:CG3Ch12F11a.png|Basic IDE]], hover the mouse cursor over the toolbar buttons to display the tool tips. Click the '''Select Macro''' button to open the OpenOffice.org Basic Macros dialog.</li>
<li>Select the Standard library in the CalcTestMacros document and click '''New''' to create a new module. Enter a meaningful name such as CalcFunctions and click '''OK'''. OOo automatically creates a macro named Main and opens the module for editing.</li>
<li>Create a macro in the Standard library that calls the implementation function (see Listing 4). The new macro loads the AuthorsCalcMacros library if it is not already loaded, and then calls the implementation function.</li>

''Listing 4. Change the name of NumberFive to NumberFive_Implementation.''

<syntaxhighlight lang=oobas>
Function NumberFive()
If NOT BasicLibraries.isLibraryLoaded("AuthorsCalcMacros") Then
BasicLibraries.LoadLibrary("AuthorsCalcMacros")
End If
NumberFive = NumberFive_Implementation()
End Function
</syntaxhighlight>

<li>Save, close, and reopen the Calc document. This time, the NumberFive() function works.</li>
</ol>

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

Documentation/OOo3 User Guides/Calc Guide/Creating editing template

2026-06-09T08:22:50Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Creating and editing a template}}
{{Documentation/CG3Ch10TOC
|ShowPrevNext=block
|PrevPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Creating spreadsheet from template
|NextPage=Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Adding templates
}}
== Creating a template ==
You can create a template from a document:

# Open a new or existing document of the type you want to make into a template (text document, spreadsheet, drawing, presentation).
# Add the content and styles that you want.
# From the main menu, choose '''File > Templates > Save. '''The Templates dialog opens.
# In the '''New template '''field, type a name for the new template.
# In the '''Categories''' list, click the category to which you want to assign the template. The category you choose has no effect on the template itself; it is simply the folder in which you save the template. Choosing an appropriate folder (category) makes it easier to find the template when you want to use it. You may wish to create a folder for Calc templates. To learn more about template folders, see [[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc Guide/Organizing templates|Organizing templates]].
# Click '''OK''' to save the new template.

[[Image:SaveTempl.png|thumb|none|500px|''Saving a new template.'']]

Any settings that can be added to or modified in a document can be saved in a template. For example, below are some of the settings (although not a full list) that can be included in a Calc document and then saved as a template for later use:

* Printer settings: which printer, single sided / double sided, and paper size, and so on
* Cell and page styles to be used

Templates can also contain predefined text, saving you from having to type it every time you create a new document. For example, an invoice template might contain your company’s name, address and logo.

You can also save menu and toolbar customizations in templates; see [[Documentation/OOo3_User_Guides/Calc_Guide/Customizing_Calc|Setting up and Customizing Calc]] for more information.

== Editing a template ==
You can edit a template’s styles and content, and then, if you wish, you can reapply the template’s styles to documents that were created from that template. (Note that you can only reapply styles. You cannot reapply content.)

To edit a template:

# From the main menu, choose '''File > Templates > Organize. '''The Template Management dialog opens.
# In the box on the left, double-click the folder that contains the template that you want to edit. A list of all the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name.
# Select the template that you want to edit.
# Click the '''Commands '''button and choose '''Edit''' from the drop-down menu.
# Edit the template just as you would any other document. To save your changes, choose '''File > Save '''from the main menu.

[[Image:TemplateMgt.png|thumb|none|500px|''Template management dialog.'']]

== Updating a spreadsheet from a changed template ==
The next time you open a spreadsheet that was created from the changed template, the following message appears.

[[Image:TemplMsg3.png|thumb|none|500px|''Apply current styles message.'']]

Click '''Update Styles''' to apply the template’s changed styles to the spreadsheet. Click '''Keep Old Styles''' if you do not want to apply the template’s changed styles to the spreadsheet (but see Caution notice below).

{{Warn| If you choose '''Keep Old Styles''' in the message box shown above, that message will not appear again the next time you open the document after changing the template it is based on. You will not get another chance to update the styles from the template, although you can use the macro given in the Note below to re-enable this feature.}}

{{Note| To re-enable updating from a template:
<ol>
<li>Use '''Tools > Macros > Organize Macros > OpenOffice.org Basic'''. Select the document from the list, click the +, and select Standard. If Standard has a + beside it, click that and select a module.</li>
<li>Name the macro. For example, you could call it FixDocument. If the '''Edit''' button is active, click it. If the Edit button is not active, click '''New''', type a module name in the pop-up dialog, and click '''OK'''.</li>
<li>In the Basic window, enter the following:</li>
<syntaxhighlight lang="oobas">
Sub FixDocument
' set UpdateFromTemplate
oDocSettings = ThisComponent.createInstance( "com.sun.star.document.Settings" )
oDocSettings.UpdateFromTemplate = True
End Sub 'FixDocument
</syntaxhighlight>

<li>Click the '''Run BASIC''' icon, then close the Basic window.</li>
<li>Save the document.</li>
</ol>

Next time when you open this document you will have the update from template feature back.}}

{{CCBY}}
[[Category: Calc Guide (Documentation)]]

NL/Documentation/FAQ/Macros/Why don't my macros run any more in OOo 3?

2026-06-08T11:29:04Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Waarom werken mijn macro's niet meer in OOo 3?}}

<section begin=question/>
'''Waarom werken mijn macro's niet meer in OOo 3?'''
<section end=question/>

<section begin=answer/>
OpenOffice.org 3 gebruikt standaard een meer veilige macro-instelling. Standaard worden de macro's, die zijn opgenomen in het document, niet uitgevoerd.

De veiligheidsinstellingen wijzigen:

#Kies {{menu|Extra|Opties|Beveiligen}}.
#Klik op de knop {{button|Macroveiligheid}}.
#Wijzig het beveiligingsniveau naar '''Medium'''.
:U kunt ook uw map waar de door u vertrouwde documenten zijn opgeslagen toevoegen aan de lijst met '''Vertrouwde bronnen'''.

<section end=answer/>

[[Category:NL/Documentation/FAQ/Macros]]

Documentation/Wiki Books

2026-06-08T11:26:34Z

DiGro:

<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">
Wikibooks for the Current Release</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
== Current Release: ==
</div>
<div style="padding: 5px; font-size:120%; font-weight:bold; background-color: #CDDBF6;">
Wikibooks for Older Releases</div>
<div style="border: 1px solid #CDDBF6; margin-bottom: 15px;">
== OpenOffice.org 3.2 ==
* Administration Guide
** {{PDF}}[[Media:AdministrationGuide_OOo3.2.0.pdf|PDF]] - 2010-03-08 (March 08) - 421 kb
** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AdministrationGuide_OOo3.2.0.odt|ODT]] - 2010-03-08 (March 08) - 268 kb
* Basic Guide
** {{PDF}}[[Media:BasicGuide_OOo3.2.0.pdf|PDF]] - 2010-03-08 (March 08) - 941 kb
** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:BasicGuide_OOo3.2.0.odt|ODT]] - 2010-03-08 (March 08) - 454 kb
* Developer's Guide
** {{PDF}} PDF - See 3.1 release
** {{OOoLogo}} ODT - See 3.1 release

== Openoffice.org 3.1 ==
* Administration Guide
** {{PDF}}[[Media:AdministrationGuide_OOo3.1.0.pdf|PDF]] - 2009-04-24 (April 24) - 416 kb
** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AdministrationGuide_OOo3.1.0.odt|ODT]] - 2009-04-24 (April 24) - 292 kb
* Basic Guide
** {{PDF}}[[Media:BasicGuide_OOo3.1.0.pdf|PDF]] - 2009-04-24 (April 24) - 1 Mb
** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:BasicGuide_OOo3.1.0.odt|ODT]] - 2009-04-24 (April 24) - 470 kb
* Developer's Guide
**{{PDF}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0.pdf|Developer's Guide All Chapters]]- 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 16.8Mb
**{{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0.odt|Developer's Guide All Chapters]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 23.85Mb
** Developer's Guide Individual Chapters:
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_01FirstSteps.odt|Chapter 01 First Steps]] - 2009-08-20 (Aug 20) - 1.08 Mb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_02ProUNO.odt|Chapter 02 Professional UNO]] - 2009-08-20 (Aug 20) - 1.64 Mb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_03WritingUNO.odt|Chapter 03 Writing UNO Components]] - 2009-08-20 (Aug 20) - 1.39 Mb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_04Extensions.odt|Chapter 04 Extensions]] - 2009-08-21 (Aug 21) - 285 Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_05AdvancedUNO.odt|Chapter 05 Advanced UNO]] - 2009-08-21 (Aug 21) - 699 Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_06OfficeDevelopment.odt|Chapter 06 Office Development]] - 2009-08-21 (Aug 21) - 2.51 Mb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_07TextDocuments.odt|Chapter 07 Text Documents]] - 2009-08-28 (Aug 28) - 1.2 Mb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_08SpreadsheetDocuments.odt|Chapter 08 Spreadsheet Documents]] - 2009-09-02 (Sept 02) - 7.19 Mb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_09DrawingDocuments.odt|Chapter 09 Drawing Documents and Presentation Documents]] - 2009-09-02 (Sept 02) - 1.75 Mb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_10Charts.odt|Chapter 10 Charts]] - 2009-09-02 (Sept 02) - 518Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_11OOoBasic.odt|Chapter 11 OpenOffice.org Basic]] - 2009-09-02 (Sept 02) - 1.39Mb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_12DatabaseAccess.odt|Chapter 12 Database Access]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 3.8Mb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_13Forms.odt|Chapter 13 Forms]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 1.31Mb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_14UCB.odt|Chapter 14 Universal Content Broker]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 390Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_15ConfigurationManagement.odt|Chapter 15 Configuration Management]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 584Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_16JavaBean.odt|Chapter 16 JavaBean for Office Components]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 453Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_17Accessibility.odt|Chapter 17 Accessibility]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 445Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_18Scripting.odt|Chapter 18 Scripting Framework]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 941Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_19GUI.odt|Chapter 19 Graphical User Interfaces]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 280Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_AppA.odt|Appendix A OpenOffice.org API-Design-Guidelines]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 240Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_AppB.odt|Appendix B IDL Documentation Guidelines]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 240Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_AppC.odt|Appendix C Universal Content Providers]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 557Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_AppD.odt|Appendix D UNOIDL Syntax Specification]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 233Kb
*** {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.1.0_Glossary.odt|Glossary]] - 2009-09-03 (Sept 03) - 248Kb
== Openoffice.org 3.0 ==
* Administration Guide - {{PDF}}[[Media:AdministrationGuide_OOo3.0.0.pdf|PDF]] / {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:AdministrationGuide_OOo3.0.0.odt|ODT]] - 2009-01-19 (Jan 19)
* Basic Guide - {{PDF}}[[Media:BasicGuide_OOo3.0.0.pdf|PDF]] / {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:BasicGuide_OOo3.0.0.odt|ODT]] - 2009-01-26 (Jan 26)
* Developer's Guide - PDF / {{OOoLogo}}[[Media:DevelopersGuide_OOo3.0.0.odt|ODT]] DRAFT (no illustrations) - 2009-01-30 (30 Jan) - 1.55MB
</div>
[[Category: Documentation]]

NL/Documentation/How Tos/Referencing data in a spreadsheet

2026-06-08T10:10:10Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Verwijzen naar gegevens in een werkblad}}
__NOTOC__

U kunt verwijzen naar andere cellen of bladen in hetzelfde document. De resulterende gegevens wijzigen overeenkomstig als de bron wordt gewijzigd.

Veronderstel dat u in een werkblad probeert de waarden van cel A1 op Blad1 en cel B1 op Blad2 bij elkaar op te tellen en het resultaat in cel C1 op Blad3 te plaatsen.<br />Voer de volgende stappen uit om dat te bereiken:
<ol>
<li>Selecteer cel C1 in Blad3.</li>
<li>Op de werkbalk '''Formule''', klik op het pictogram '''Functie''' [[File:s_function_icon.jpg]].</li>
<li>U kunt een van de volgende manieren gebruiken om de formule te bewerken:
<ul>
<li>Voer in <tt>Blad.A1+Blad2.B1</tt> na het "is gelijk aan"'-teken (=).</li>
<li>U kunt ook de formule voltooien door de cellen te selecteren op de volgende manier:
<ol type="a">
<li>In Blad1, selecteer cel A1.</li>
<li>In Blad3, voer een plusteken in (+) in de '''invoerregel Formule'''.</li>
<li>In Blad2, selecteer cel B1.</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>In Blad3, klik op het pictogram '''Accepteren''' [[File:AOO41CG05 125a iconApply.png]] op de werkbalk '''Formule'''.</li>
</ol>

U zult zien dat de som van de waarden in cel A1 op Blad1 en cel B1 op Blad2 wordt weergegeven in C1.

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]
{{Documentation/Languages}}

NL/Documentation/How Tos/Referencing data in a spreadsheet

2026-06-08T10:08:51Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Verwijzen naar gegevens in een werkblad}}
__NOTOC__

U kunt verwijzen naar andere cellen of bladen in hetzelfde document. De resulterende gegevens wijzigen overeenkomstig als de bron wordt gewijzigd.

Veronderstel dat u in een werkblad probeert de waarden van cel A1 op Blad1 en cel B1 op Blad2 bij elkaar op te tellen en het resultaat in cel C1 op Blad3 te plaatsen.<br />Voer de volgende stappen uit om dat te bereiken:
<ol>
<li>Selecteer cel C1 in Blad3.</li>
<li>Op de werkbalk '''Formule''', klik op het pictogram '''Functie''' [[File:s_function_icon.jpg]].</li>
<li>U kunt een van de volgende manieren gebruiken om de formule te bewerken:
<ul>
<li>Voer in <tt>Blad.A1+Blad2.B1</tt> na het "is gelijk aan"'-teken (=).</li>
<li>U kunt ook de formule voltooien door de cellen te selecteren op de volgende manier:
<ol type="a">
<li>In Blad1, selecteer cel A1.</li>
<li>In Blad3, voer een plusteken in (+) in de '''invoerregel Formule'''.</li>
<li>In Blad2, selecteer cel B1.</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>In Blad3 klik op het pictogram '''Accepteren''' [[File:AOO41CG05 125a iconApply.png]] op de werkbalk '''Formule'''.</li>
</ol>

U zult zien dat de som van de waarden in cel A1 op Blad1 en cel B1 op Blad2 wordt weergegeven in C1.

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]
{{Documentation/Languages}}

NL/Documentation/How Tos/Referencing data in a spreadsheet

2026-06-08T10:07:27Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Verwijzen naar gegevens in een werkblad}}
__NOTOC__

U kunt verwijzen naar andere cellen of bladen in hetzelfde document. De resulterende gegevens wijzigen overeenkomstig als de bron wordt gewijzigd.

Veronderstel dat u in een werkblad probeert de waarden van cel A1 op Blad1 en cel B1 op Blad2 bij elkaar op te tellen en het resultaat in cel C1 op Blad3 te plaatsen. Voer de volgende stappen uit om dat te bereiken:
<ol>
<li>Selecteer cel C1 in Blad3.</li>
<li>Op de werkbalk '''Formule''', klik op het pictogram '''Functie''' [[File:s_function_icon.jpg]].</li>
<li>U kunt een van de volgende manieren gebruiken om de formule te bewerken:
<ul>
<li>Voer in <tt>Blad.A1+Blad2.B1</tt> na het "is gelijk aan"'-teken (=).</li>
<li>U kunt ook de formule voltooien door de cellen te selecteren op de volgende manier:
<ol type="a">
<li>In Blad1, selecteer cel A1.</li>
<li>In Blad3, voer een plusteken in (+) in de '''invoerregel Formule'''.</li>
<li>In Blad2, selecteer cel B1.</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>In Blad3 klik op het pictogram '''Accepteren''' [[File:AOO41CG05 125a iconApply.png]] op de werkbalk '''Formule'''.</li>
</ol>

U zult zien dat de som van de waarden in cel A1 op Blad1 en cel B1 op Blad2 wordt weergegeven in C1.

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]
{{Documentation/Languages}}

NL/Documentation/How Tos/Referencing data in a spreadsheet

2026-06-08T10:06:06Z

DiGro: Created page with "{{DISPLAYTITLE: Verwijzen naar gegevens in een werkblad}} __NOTOC__ U kunt verwijzen naar andere cellen of bladen in hetzelfde document. De resulterende gegevens wijzigen ove..."

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Verwijzen naar gegevens in een werkblad}}
__NOTOC__

U kunt verwijzen naar andere cellen of bladen in hetzelfde document. De resulterende gegevens wijzigen overeenkomstig als de bron wordt gewijzigd.

Veronderstel dat u in een werkblad probeert de waarden van cel A1 op Blad1 en cel B1 op Blad2 bij elkaar op te tellen en het resultaat in cel C1 op Blad3 te plaatsen. Voer de volgende stappen uit om dat te bereiken:
<ol>
<li>Selecteer cel C1 in Blad3.</li>
<li>Op de werkbalk '''Formule''', klik op het pictogram '''Functie''' [[File:s_function_icon.jpg]].</li>
<li>U kunt een van de volgende manieren gebruiken om de formule te bewerken:
<ul>
<li>Voer in <tt>Blad.A1+Blad2.B1</tt> na het "is gelijk aan"'-teken (=).</li>
<li>U kunt ook de formule voltooien door de cellen te selecteren op de volgende manier:
<ol type="a">
<li>In Blad1, selecteer cel A1.</li>
<li>In Blad3, voer een plusteken in (+) in de '''invoerregel Formule'''.</li>
<li>In Blad2, selecteer cel B1.</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>In Blad3 klik op het pictogram '''Accepteren''' [[File:AOO41CG05 125a iconApply.png]] op de werkbalk '''Formule'''.</li>
</ol>

U zult zien dat de som van de waarden in cel A1 op Blad1 en cel B1 op Blad2 wordt weergegeven in C1.

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]

NL/Documentation/How Tos/Referencing data from other spreadsheets

2026-06-08T09:54:44Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Verwijzen naar gegevens in andere werkbladen}}

U kunt naar gegevens in andere werkbladen verwijzen en die bijwerken.
<ol>
<li>In uw huidige werkblad, selecteer de cel waar de verwijzing moet komen.</li>
<li>Op de werkbalk '''Formule''', klik op het pictogram '''Functie'''.</li>
<li>In de '''invoerregel Formule''', voer de code in, en wel in de volgende indeling:<br /> <tt>PadnaarBestand'#BladNaam.GegevensBereik</tt><br />
Bijvoorbeeld: om te verwijzen naar ''A1:B5'' in het bestand ''voorbeeld.ods'' in de map ''c:/temp/'', voer in '''file:/c:/temp/voorbeeld.ods'#Blad1.A1:B5'''.</li>
<li>Druk op {{key|Enter}}.</li>
</ol>

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]
{{Documentation/Languages}}

NL/Documentation/How Tos/Referencing data from other spreadsheets

2026-06-08T09:53:18Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Verwijzen naar gegevens in andere werkbladen}}

U kunt naar gegevens in andere werkbladen verwijzen en die bijwerken.
<ol>
<li>In uw huidige werkblad, selecteer de cel waar de verwijzing moet komen.</li>
<li>Op de werkbalk '''Formule''', klik op het pictogram '''Functie'''.</li>
<li>In de '''invoerregel Formule''', voer de code in, en wel in de volgende indeling:<br /> <tt>PadnaarBestandNaamBladGegevensBereik</tt><br />
Bijvoorbeeld: om te verwijzen naar ''A1:B5'' in het bestand ''voorbeeld.ods'' in de map ''c:/temp/'', voer in '''file:/c:/temp/voorbeeld.ods'#Blad1.A1:B5'''.</li>
<li>Druk op {{key|Enter}}.</li>
</ol>

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]
{{Documentation/Languages}}

NL/Documentation/How Tos/Referencing data from other spreadsheets

2026-06-08T09:48:24Z

DiGro:

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Verwijzen naar gegevens in andere werkbladen}}

U kunt naar gegevens in andere werkbladen verwijzen en die bijwerken.
<ol>
<li>In uw huidige werkblad, selecteer de cel waar de verwijzing moet komen.</li>
<li>Op de werkbalk '''Formule''', klik op het pictogram '''Functie'''.</li>
<li>In de '''invoerregel Formule''', voer de code in, en wel in de volgende indeling:<br /> <tt>PadnaarBestandNaamBladGegevensBereik</tt><br />
Bijvoorbeeld: om te verwijzen naar ''A1:B5'' in het bestand ''voorbeeld.ods'' in de map ''c:/temp/'', voer in '''file:/c:/temp/voorbeeld.ods'#Blad1.A1:B5'''.</li>
<li>Druk op {{key|Enter}}.</li>
</ol>

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]

NL/Documentation/How Tos/Referencing data from other spreadsheets

2026-06-08T09:47:09Z

DiGro: Created page with "{{DISPLAYTITLE: Verwijzen naar gegevens in andere werkbladen}} U kunt naar gegevens in andere werkbladen verwijzen en die bijwerken. <ol> <li>In uw huidige werkblad, selectee..."

{{DISPLAYTITLE: Verwijzen naar gegevens in andere werkbladen}}

U kunt naar gegevens in andere werkbladen verwijzen en die bijwerken.
<ol>
<li>In uw huidige werkblad, selecteer de cel waar de verwijzing moet komen.</li>
<li>Op de werkbalk '''Formule''', klik op het pictogram '''Functie'''.</li>
<li>In de '''invoerregel Formule''', voer de code in, en wel in de volgende indeling:<br /> <tt>PadnaarBestandNaamBladGegevensBereik</tt><br />
Bijvoorbeeld: om te verwijzen naar A1:B5 in het bestand '''voorbeeld.ods''' in de map '''c:/temp/''', voer in ''''file:/c:/temp/voorbeeld.ods'#Blad1.A1:B5.</li>
<li>Druk op {{key|Enter}}.</li>
</ol>

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]

Referencing data in a spreadsheet

2026-06-08T09:35:26Z

DiGro:

You can reference data from other cells or sheets in the same document. The result data changes accordingly when the source data has changed.

Suppose that in a spreadsheet, you are trying to sum the values of cell A1 in Sheet1 and cell B1 in Sheet2, and put the result into cell C1 in Sheet3. To accomplish the task, do the following steps:
<ol>
<li>Select cell C1 in Sheet3.</li>
<li>On the <span class="ph uicontrol">Formula</span> toolbar, click the '''Function''' icon [[File:s_function_icon.jpg]].</li>
<li>You can use either of the following ways to edit the formula.
<ul>
<li>Enter <tt>Sheet1.A1+Sheet2.B1</tt> after the Equal sign (=).</li>
<li>You can also complete the formula by selecting the cells in the
following way:
<ol type="a">
<li>In Sheet1, select cell A1.</li>
<li>In Sheet3, enter a Plus sign (+) in the '''Formula InputLine'''.</li>
<li>In Sheet2, select cell B1.</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>In Sheet3, click the '''Accept''' icon [[File:AOO41CG05 125a iconApply.png]] on the '''Formula''' toolbar.</li>
</ol>

You can see that the sum value of cell A1 in Sheet1 and cell B1 in Sheet2 is displayed in C1.

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]

Referencing data in a spreadsheet

2026-06-08T09:31:01Z

DiGro:

You can reference data from other cells or sheets in the same document. The result data changes accordingly when the source data has changed.

Suppose that in a spreadsheet, you are trying to sum the values of cell A1 in Sheet1 and cell B1 in Sheet2, and put the result into cell C1 in Sheet3. To accomplish the task, do the following steps:
<ol>
<li>Select cell C1 in Sheet3.</li>
<li>On the <span class="ph uicontrol">Formula</span> toolbar, click the '''Function''' icon [[File:s_function_icon.jpg]].</li>
<li>You can use either of the following ways to edit the formula.
<ul>
<li>Enter <tt>Sheet1.A1+Sheet2.B1</tt> after the Equal sign (=).</li>
<li>You can also complete the formula by selecting the cells in the
following way:
<ol type="a">
<li>In Sheet1, select cell A1.</li>
<li>In Sheet3, enter a Plus sign (+) in the '''Formula InputLine'''.</li>
<li>In Sheet2, select cell B1.</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>In Sheet3, click the '''Accept''' icon on the '''Formula''' toolbar.</li>
</ol>

You can see that the sum value of cell A1 in Sheet1 and cell B1 in Sheet2 is displayed in C1.

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]

Referencing data from other spreadsheets

2026-06-08T09:23:13Z

DiGro:

You can reference data from other spreadsheets and update
it.
<ol>
<li>In your current spreadsheet, select the cell to add the reference.</li>
<li>On the '''Formula''' toolbar, click the '''Function''' icon.</li>
<li>In the '''Formula Input Line''', enter the code in the following format:<br /> <tt>FilePathSheetNameDataRange</tt><br />
For example, to reference A1:B5 in the '''example.ods''' file under the '''c:/temp/''' directory, enter ''''file:/c:/temp/example.ods'#Sheet1.A1:B5</samp>.</li>
<li>Press {{key|Enter}}.</li>
</ol>

[[Category:Documentation]]
[[Category:Calc]]

Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Page

2026-06-06T14:28:06Z

DiGro: /* Shadow Style */

{{DraftPage|EN}}

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Working with frames and sections on Writer}}

== Frames ==

=== Inserting a Frame ===

Frames in Writer are similar to LaTeX "minipages". Basically, a frame is a small "floating page" on top of a real page. Frames accept any kind of content: text; pictures; tables... even other frames.

Frames are used extensively in Writer: each inserted picture, OLE object (Math objects, charts...), are inside a frame. When a caption is added to a picture, this picture, which is already inside a frame, will be automatically included on another frame that enclose the paragraph with the automatic numbering.

The screenshot below shows the result of the menu command {{Menu|Insert|Frame}}. The purpose of the individual tabs will be discussed in the following sections.

[[File:AOO-Frame.png]]

==== Type Tab ====

This tab is used to describe the overall size of the frame, how it is anchored, and how it is positioned relative to the anchoring method.
===== Size =====
This section of the tab defines the overall size of the frame.
; Width : A spin box to set the width of the frame.
*; "Relative" : A Check Box that when checked means "Relative to the text area".
*; "Automatic" : A Check Box that when checked makes the frame grow with the content.
; Height(at least) : A spin box to set the minimum height of the frame.
*; "Relative" : A Check Box that when checked means "Relative to the text area".
*; "Auto<u>S</u>ize" : A Check Box that when checked makes the frame grow with the content.
; "Keep ratio" forces width and height of the frame to grow proportionally.

===== Anchor =====
This this section how the frame will be positioned from a reference point; that is the point at which the frame was inserted.

; To page : This associates the frame with the page on which it was inserted.
{{Warn|It is important to be careful with this option because the picture will remain on that page ''even if all the previous pages are empty''.}}
; To paragraph : the default option. The picture will follow the paragraph in which it was inserted.
; To character : similar to the previous option, but considering the exact point inside the paragraph where the image was inserted.
; As character : the frame will move inside the text as if it were anchored to a character. This is the default option for frames associated with Math objects.

===== Position =====
This section of tab defines the position options for the frame.

{{Warn|The available options will depend upon the selected anchoring: for example, selecting "As character" we lose the horizontal position options.}}
Two important options are "Mirror on even/odd pages" and "Follow text flow".

The mirror option will automatically change the frame position when we are on an odd or even page. For example, if we choose "Outside" will be positioned to the right on odd pages and to the left on even pages.

The option "Follow text flow" is useful to avoid the possibility of a frame going outside the limits of the text area on the page.

=== Options tab ===

[[File:AOO_Frame_Options_Tab.png]]

As shown above, the Options tab allows the setting of various options for the frame.

* Name
** The unique name of the frame
*** This makes it simpler to identify on the [[Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Navigator|Navigator]].
*** Default is Frame''nnn'' where ''nnn'' is an increasing number starting at 1.
* Previous Link
** The name of the previous frame in a linked set.
* Next Link
** The name of the next frame in a linked set.

{{Note|When linking two or more frames, the content of the one will be able to flow to the next. The frames can be on different pages: when the first one is full, the content will flow to the next.}}

*Protect
** This section allows you to protect various attributes of the frame.
*Contents
** When checked this option protects the contents of the frame from being changed.
* Position
** When checked this option protects the position of the frame from being changed.
*Size
** When checked this option protects the size of the frame from being changed.
* Text Direction
** This section sets the text direction for the frame. The options are as follows.
*** Left-to-right (horizontal)
**** Left justified text
*** Right-to-left (horizontal)
**** Right justified text
*** Left-to-right (vertical)
**** Vertical text aligned to the left margin
*** Use superordinate object settings
**** Use the default text flow settings for the page. This is the default.

=== Wrap tab ===

Here it is possible to define how the text and other content flow around the frame. For example, if the frame takes only a fraction of the page width it is possible to set the text to surround it: the option "Optimal" will be the more appropriate in this situation.

[[File:AOO_Frame_Wrap_Tab.png]]

The screenshot above shows all the attributes that can be set on this tab.
* Settings
** None
*** No wrapping of text
**Before
*** Text wraps before the frame only
** After
*** Text wraps after the frame only
** Parallel
*** Text wraps around the frame on all sides
** Through
*** Frame is placed in front of text
** Optimal
*** Automatically wraps text on all four sides of frame
{{Note|If the object is less than 2cm from the page margin the text is not wrapped}}

* Spacing
** Left
*** Space between text and left side of frame
** Right
*** Space between text and right side of frame
** Top
*** Space between text and top of frame
** Bottom
*** Space between text and bottom of frame

* Options
** First paragraph
** makes the selected wrap option valid only for the first paragraph: the following paragraphs will move to below the frame
** In background
*** sends frame behind the content

{{Note|Valid only for the Through wrap setting.}}
{{Note|To select a frame set "in background", it is necessary to perform a {{Key|Ctrl}}+click over it.}}

=== Hyperlink Tab ===

[[File:AOO_Frame_Hyperlink_Tab.png]]

This tab is used to associate a hyperlink to the frame. The file can be a local file on the computer or local network, or on the internet. The hyperlink will work with a {{Key|Ctrl}}+Click on the frame. The options for this screen are as follows.

*Link To
** URL
*** Complete path of file
** {{Key|Browse}}
*** Browse computer or local network for file
** Name
*** Name for hyperlink
** Frame
*** ID of frame to associate to.

*Image Map
**Server Side Image Map
*** Uses image map on remote server
**Client Side Image Map
*** Uses client side image map

=== Borders tab ===

[[File:AOO_Frame_Border_Tab.png]]

As the name implies, the function of this tab is to draw borders around the frame. The different options available will be discussed below.

==== Line Arrangement ====
This section of the tab is used to define the way the lines are arranged to form the border. It is further divided into Default and User Defined areas as defined below.

:'''''<big>Default</big>
::This area has five predefined border arrangements as defined below from left to right. They are activated by clicking on them with the mouse.
::* None
::** No border, this is the default setting.
::* Set All Four Borders
::** Creates border on all 4 sides
::* Set Left and Right Borders Only
::** Create border on left and right only
::* Set Top and Bottom Borders Only
::** Create border on the top and bottom only
::* Set Left Border Only
::** Create border on left side only
:'''''<big>User Defined</big>
::This area is used to define a custom border arrangement. This is done by clicking the side (or sides) of the shaded area that you want the border on. For example if you wanted the border on the right and top of the frame you would click those sides of the area.
{{Tip|Clicking the upper right corner of the area would select both sides with one click.}}

==== Line ====

This section is used to define the attributes of the lines used to form the border. It is further divided into Style and Color areas as defined below.
:'''''<big>Style</big>
::* Presents a list box with various styles of lines and thicknesses that can be used to form the borders.
::** Default single line of 0.05 points.

:'''''<big>Color</big>
::* Presents a drop-down list of available colors for lines.
::** Default is Black

==== Spacing to Contents ====
Used to set the spacing between the edges of the border and the content. Each edge can be set individually or synchronized to the same distance.
:'''''<big>Left</big>
::* Spin-box to set distance to left edge
:'''''<big>Right</big>
::* Spin-box to set distance to right edge

:'''''<big>Top</big>
::* Spin-box to set distance to top edge

:'''''<big>Bottom</big>
::* Spin-box to set distance to bottom edge

:'''''<big>Synchronize</big>
::* Check box to synch all edges to identical value on entering it in one spin-box.
{{Note|Defaults for all the spacing parameters are dependent on the entry in the Line Arrangement section.}}

====Shadow Style====
This section allows the setting of a shadow detail to the border.
:'''''<big>Position</big>
::* 5 click-able images that control shadow placement (defined below left to right)
:::* No Shadow (Default)
:::* Cast shadow to bottom right
:::* Cast shadow to bottom left
:::* Cast shadow to top right
:::* Cast shadow to top left

:'''''<big>Distance</big>
::* Spin box to define the width of the shadow

:'''''<big>Color</big>
::* Drop down list of available colors for shadow

{{Note|Defaults for Distance and Color parameters are dependent on the Position section as defined in the chart below.}}

{| style="border-spacing:0; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto"
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">Position</span></big>
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">Distance
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:0.035cm solid #000000;padding:0.15cm;"| <big><span style="color:white">Color</span></big>

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| No Shadow
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Inactive
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Inactive

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| All Other Position
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| 0.07 Inches
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Gray 6

|}

=== Background Tab ===
This tab is used to set a background for the frame. The background can be either a continuous color or an image. Each type will be described in a separate section.

==== Background Tab Color ====

[[File:AOO_Frame_Background_Tab_Color.png]]

The above illustration shows the tab set for the use of a continuous background color.

:'''''As'''''
:* Drop down list specifying the type of background.
:'''''Background color'''''
:* Palette of color choices.
:** Color chosen will appear in the box next to the palette and the name at the bottom of the palette.
{{Note|The No Fill selection specifies no background fill and is the default.}}
:'''''Transparency'''''
:* Spin box to set the transparency level of the background color.
:** Range is 0% (opaque) to 100% (completely transparent)
:*** Default is 0%
{{Note|Increasing the transparency allows the underlying text or objects to become visible through the background.}}

==== Background Tab Graphic ====

[[File:AOO_Frame_Background_Tab_Graphic.png]]

The above illustration shows the tab set for the use of a graphic background.

:'''''As'''''
:* Drop down list specifying type of background
:'''''File'''''
:* {{Key|Browse}}
:** Browse computer or local network for file
:* '''''Link'''''
:** Check-box to create a [[Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Intro/Insert#Embedded_and_linked_images|link]] to the graphic rather then embed it directly
:*** Default is unchecked
:* Unlinked Graphic
:** Shows whether the graphic is unlinked or linked depending on the state of the '''''Link''''' check-box
:*** Default is as shown
:*** If linked will show the path to the file

=== Columns tab ===
[[File:AOO_Frame_Columns_Tab.png]]

As shown above the columns tab is used to set-up the contents of the frame in a columnar fashion.
=== Macro tab ===

To associate a macro with the frame, in a way that the selected macro automatically activates when a selected event is verified, like a click on the frame or the introduction text on it.

==Sections==

It is possible to separate a Writer document into "blocks" that are more or less self-contained called "Sections". These sections can be as short as a paragraph, as long as several pages or can cover the whole document. Sections are useful: to have different number of columns on the same page; to insert an external document; as a whole block from the document that is hidden when a condition is fulfilled... This page shows how to use them.

= Inserting a section =

From the {{Menu|Insert|Section}} menu we will see

[[File:AOO-SectionInsert.png]]

== Section tab ==

Here it is possible to accomplish several tasks.
* Give a name to the section, so it is easier to find on the [[Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Navigator|Navigator]].
** Select the text listed in the box and type an appropriate name that describes the section.
* Link the section with a different part of the document or with a different file, to show the linked content.
* Protect the section content with a password, avoiding editing.
* Set a condition to hide the section, making it invisible on the document. We will come back to this when discussing [[Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Fields|variables and fields]].
* Set the section to be editable even on read only documents, for example to build a form.

== Columns tab ==
As with '''frames''', it is possible to set the section to be separated in columns even if the [[Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Styles/Page|page style]] over which the section flows do not have them.
This is particularly useful to have a different number of columns on the same page, for example when creating a scientific paper where subject and abstract are on one column while the rest of the document is on two.

The option "Evenly distribute contents to all columns" makes the columns fill simultaneously when content is added: with the option set to off the left column will fill before the other ones.

== Indents tab ==

To define a minimum space before and after a section.

== Background tab ==

To set either a background color or a background image for the section.

== Footnotes/Endnotes ==

To group the notes at the end of a section, restart the numbering, etc. We will come back to this topic [[Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Notes|later]].

== Editing Sections ==

To change the settings of an existing section go to {{Menu|Format|Sections}}.

[[File:AOO-SectionEdit.png|600px]]

On the left list is it possible to select the section to be modified. As can be seen in the screenshot the available options are the same as you get under the Section tab when a section is created. The other options are accessible from the {{Button|Options}} button.

[[Category:Documentation]] [[Category:Documentation/Writer]]

Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Text

2026-06-06T14:21:03Z

DiGro: /* En and em dashes */

{{DraftPage|EN}}

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Working with Text}}

In Writer, you can use the toolbars, the sidebar and menus (normal and contextual) to modify text. For example, modify the selected paragraph through {{Menu|Format|Paragraph}} (choose {{Menu|Character}} to format text). Alternatively, right click the selection and choose {{Menu|Paragraph}} or {{Menu|Character}}.

Formatting tools are available through the Format menu or a right click on the page. But it is important to note that these options only modify the corresponding page style. ''In Writer there is no direct formatting for pages, page formatting can only be done through styles''. For this reason, we will leave the details on how to format pages to the corresponding section for page styles.

= Selecting Text =

In Writer, in order to work with text, you need to select it. Selecting a piece of text, or consecutive pieces of text, is relatively simple.

Using the cursor, left click the text, and drag until the desired text is selected. You can also use selection shortcuts by left clicking the text. Single words can be selected with a double left click, a sentence selected with a triple left click, and a paragraph selected with a quadruple left click.

With the keyboard, use the navigation arrows to choose the text, hold down the {{Key|Shift}} key and select text area with the arrow keys.

[[Image:Writer-consecutive-selection-text-border.png]]

To quickly select content on the entire page, press {{Key|Control|A}}, or go to {{Menu|Edit|Select All}}.

== Selecting items that are not consecutive ==

# Using the cursor, select the first piece of text.
# Hold down the {{Key|Control}} key (continue holding until all selections are complete), and use the cursor to select the next piece of text.
# Repeat until all selections are made.

[[Image:Writer-unconsecutive-selection-text-border.png]]

== Selecting a vertical block of text ==

Text may be separated by spaces or tabs in a vertical block. To select text in this form, change the selection mode to block by choosing {{Menu|Edit|Selection Mode|Block Area}} or left click on STD in the status bar until it changes to BLK.

[[Image:Writer-status-bar-block-mode-border.png]]

Now you can make your selection as you would with consecutive text selection.

[[Image:Writer-block-selection-text-border.png]]

= Cutting, copying and pasting text =

Text can be moved within a document, or between documents by cutting or copying and subsequently pasting the text.

Cutting text entails removing it entirely and relocating it within the document. Copying text creates a duplicate to be placed within the document.

To cut or copy (with text selected) you can use:
*''Keyboard shortcuts'': {{Key|Control|X}} (cut) or {{Key|Control|C}} (copy)
*''Menu selections'': {{Menu|Edit|Cut}} or {{Menu|Edit|Copy}}
*''Contextual menus'': Right click text selection and choose {{Menu|Cut}} or {{Menu|Copy}}
*''Icon sources'': [[Image:Writer-cut-icon.png]] Cut or [[Image:Writer-copy-icon.png]] Copy

Pasting text places the cut or copied text in the document. When pasting text, the formatting result depends on the source and how you paste it.

To paste and retain original formatting use:
*''Keyboard shortcut'': {{Key|Control|V}}
*''Menu selection'': {{Menu|Edit|Paste}}
*''Contextual menu'': Right click and choose {{Menu|Paste}}
*''Icon source'': [[Image:Writer-paste-icon.png]] Paste

To paste and take on formatting of the surrounding text:
*Choose the arrow to the right of the paste icon, and choose {{Menu|Unformatted text}}
[[Image:Writer-paste-icon-menu.png]]
*Select {{Menu|Edit|Paste Special|Unformatted text}}

For other paste formatting options, choose from the drop down menu of the paste icon or the Paste Special dialog box.

[[Image:Writer-Paste-Special-dialog-box.png|600px|500px]]

= Numbered and bulleted lists =

There are several ways to create numbered or bulleted lists:
* Auto-formatting (covered later in this chapter)
* List Styles (covered in the chapter on Styles)
* The Numbering [[Image:Writer-numbering-icon.jpg]] and Bullets [[Image:Writer-bullets-icon.jpg]] icons on the paragraph formatting toolbar. The use of these icons will be described in the section below.

{{Warn|It is important to note that it is better to avoid the use of numbered list in numbered chapters. In another section of this guide we will see how to number chapters and give an outline to a document.}}

To produce a numbered or bulleted list, select the paragraphs in the list and choose the appropriate icon.

[[Image:Writer-create-numbered-list.jpg]]

==Using the Bullets and Numbering Toolbar==

With a numbered or bulleted list active, a contextual toolbar will open.

[[File:AOO-BulletNumbering.png]]

The buttons, numbered on the screenshot, perform the following actions:

# Bullets ON/OFF
# Numbering ON/OFF
# Numbering OFF
# Promote one level
# Demote one level
# Promote one level with sub-points
# Demote one level with sub-points
# Insert an unnumbered entry
# Move line up
# Move line down
# Move line up with sub-points
# Move line down with sub-points
# Restart numbering
# Bullets and Numbering dialog box

The options in the Bullets and Numbering dialog box are the same as when editing a list style, so these properties will be covered in the chapter on List Styles.

==Nested Lists==

As mentioned earlier, list sub-points refer to the levels of a numbered list or bullet, see example below:

# First
## Sub First
# Second
## Sub Second
### Sub Sub Second

To change the level of one line in the list, either use the {{Menu|Promote/Demote Level}} [[Image:Writer-promote-or-demote-icons.jpg]] icons in the Bullets and Numbering toolbar, or place the cursor at the beginning of the line and press {{Key|TAB}} or {{Key|Shift|TAB}}.

=AutoText=

Use AutoText to insert text, tables, fields and other items for reuse, by assigning a key combination to the item for retrieval.

For example, by typing ''dt'' and {{Key|F3}}, a long paragraph with a sample text will insert into the document (note: ''dt'' stands for ''dummy text'' and different acronyms may apply to non-English versions: use {{Menu|Edit|AutoText}} to see the one appropriate for your language). Typing ''fn'' and {{Key|F3}} will produce a table with one row and two columns, with a Math object on the left cell and a variable on the other.

Both examples show what AutoText does and its use, which is to introduce a document snip previously defined in any place using only an abbreviation and a keyboard shortcut.

== Inserting an AutoText ==

Insert an AutoText by typing the abbreviation followed by {{Key|F3}}.

To view the available abbreviations, you can choose {{Menu|Edit|AutoText}} ({{Key|Ctrl|F3}}), but an easier method is [[Documentation/UserGuide/UI#Toolbars|activating the Insert toolbar]]. With the toolbar active choose the AutoText icon [[Image:Writer-Insert-toolbar-autotext.png]]. You can now view the AutoText categories and their respective abbreviations.

[[File:AOO-InsertAutoText.png|600px]]

== Defining an AutoText ==

# Select the content you want to use for an AutoText. The content can be anything: text, tables, pictures, frames, sections, etc.
# With the content selected, go to {{Menu|Edit|AutoText}}.
# The AutoText dialog box will appear. Provide a name for your entry in the ''Name'' box. Writer will suggest a shortcut, which you can change.
# In the box to the left, choose a category for the entry, where the AutoText will be classified.
# Select the {{Button|AutoText}} button to the right, and select either {{Menu|New (text only)}} (for the AutoText to take on formatting where it is inserted into the document) or {{Menu|New}} (for the AutoText to retain its formatting).
# Select {{Button|Close}} to return to the document.

{{Warn|If the AutoText contains a table, it is necessary to select at least one line before and one line after the table, otherwise only the content and not the table itself will go into the AutoText.}}

[[File:AOO-AutoText.png|600px]]

Inside the AutoText dialog box, note the following features:

* With the option {{Menu|Display remainder of the name as suggestion while typing}} enabled, Writer will suggest an AutoText if you start to type the AutoText name. The suggestion will appear in a pop-up box, and pressing {{Key|Enter}} will insert the AutoText.
* The {{Button|Categories...}} button allows you to create new categories to classify your AutoTexts.
* {{Button|Path...}} defines where to save the AutoTexts.

== Editing an AutoText ==

In the AutoText dialog box ({{Menu|Edit|AutoText}}), you can edit your AutoText entries.

Select an existing AutoText, and choose the {{Menu|AutoText...}} button to modify or even eliminate the AutoText.

Selecting {{Menu|Edit}}, a document will open with the AutoText. Simply make the changes and save. The entry will now be available as edited.

{{Warn|The changes will apply only to AutoTexts inserted after the modification, AutoText already inserted will not be changed}}

==Print a list of AutoText entries==

# Choose {{Menu|Tools|Macros|Organize Macros|OpenOffice Basics}}.
# In the ''Macro from'' list, choose {{Menu|OpenOffice Macros|Gimmicks}}.
# Select {{Menu|AutoText}} and click {{Button|Run}}.
# A list of the AutoText entries will be generated in a new document. You can print this document.

= Find and replace text =

You can find text within a document with the Find toolbar, or the Find & Replace dialog box. In the Find & Replace dialog box, you also have the ability to:
*Find and replace words or phrases
*Find and replace specific formatting
*Find and replace paragraph styles
*Use regular expressions to find and replace text

The Find toolbar [[Image:Writer-Find-Toolbar.png]] will only allow you to search for and identify specific text or phrases. You can find the toolbar docked in the standard toolbar, or by choosing {{Menu|View|Toolbars|Find}}.

Display the Find & Replace dialog box by pressing {{Key|Control|F}} or choosing {{Menu|Edit|Find & Replace}}.

[[Image:Writer-Find-and-Replace-box.png|500px|400px]]

#Type the text you want to search for in the ''Search for'' box.
#To replace the text, type the new text in the ''Replace with'' box.
#To find text, click '''Find'''. To replace, click '''Replace'''. Choosing '''Find All''' will select all instances of the text. Selecting '''Replace All''' will replace all matches.
#You can choose from several search options such as matching case, matching whole words, or searching for similar words.

== Find and replace specific formatting ==

To quickly change the format of text from one style to another:

#Choose the {{Menu|More Options}} button to expand the dialog box and view the formatting options.
#To search for text with specific formatting, enter the text in the ''Search for'' box. To only search for formatting leave the ''Search for'' box empty.
#With the ''Search for'' box selected, choose {{Menu|Format}}.
#Select the formatting options to include and click {{Menu|OK}}.
#To replace with different text and/or formatting, perform the same actions for the ''Replace with'' box.
#Choose '''Find''', '''Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

== Find and replace paragraph styles ==

To quickly change paragraph styles from one style to another:

#Choose the {{Menu|More Options}} button to expand the dialog box.
#Select {{Menu|Search for Styles}} (if you have attributes specified this option is labeled as {{Menu|Including Styles}}).
#Select styles from the ''Search for'' and ''Replace with'' drop down menus.
#Choose '''Find''', '''Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

{{Note|Note: You can only select one style at a time}}

== Using regular expressions (wildcards) ==

Regular expressions (also known as wildcards) are combinations of characters that instruct Writer how to search for something.

#Choose the {{Menu|More Options}} button to expand the dialog box.
#Select the {{Menu|Regular expressions}} option.
#Type the search text with the regular expression and the replacement text if any.
#Choose {{button|Find}}, {{button|Find All}}, {{button|Replace}}, or {{button|Replace All}}.

Examples of common regular expressions:
{| style="border-spacing:0; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto"
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">To Find</span></big>
! style="text-align:center;background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">Use</span></big>
! style="text-align:left;background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:0.035cm solid #000000;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">Examples</span></big>

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Any single character
| style="text-align:center;background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| .
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| b<span style="color:red">.</span>d finds b<span style="color:red">a</span>d, b<span style="color:red">u</span>d, b<span style="color:red">i</span>d, b<span style="color:red">e</span>d

|-
|style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| One of the specified characters
| style="text-align:center;background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| [xyz]
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| b<span style="color:red">[iu]</span>n finds b<span style="color:red">i</span>n and b<span style="color:red">u</span>n

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"|Any single character in this range
| style="text-align:center;background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| [x-y]
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| <span style="color:red">[r-t]</span>eed finds <span style="color:red">r</span>eed, <span style="color:red">s</span>eed, and <span style="color:red">t</span>eed<br />(range must be in alphabetically ascending order)

|-
|style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Any single character except the characters inside the bracket
| style="text-align:center;background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| [^x]
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| p<span style="color:red">[^a]</span>t finds p<span style="color:red">o</span>st and p<span style="color:red">e</span>st but not past

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"|The beginning of a word
| style="text-align:center;background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| \<start
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| <span style="color:red">\<log</span> finds <span style="color:red">log</span>book and <span style="color:red">log</span>istics but not catalog

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| The end of a word
| style="text-align:center;background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| end\>
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;" | <span style="color:red">log\></span> finds cata<span style="color:red">log</span> but not logistics

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"|A paragraph marker
| style="text-align:center;background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| $
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Does not work as a replacement character, use \n instead

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A line break
| style="text-align:center;background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| \n
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Finds a line break that was inserted with {{Key|Shift|Enter}},<br />as a replacement character it inserts a paragraph marker
|}

To view a full list of regular expressions, select {{Menu|Help|OpenOffice Help}} and search for regular expressions, choose '''list of''' to display the list.

= Inserting special characters =

A special character is one that is not found on the standard keyboard. For example, ₵ ə Σ ẽ ψ are all special characters.

To insert a special character:
#Place the cursor in the document where you want the character to appear.
#Select {{Menu|Insert|Special Character}} for the Special Character dialog box.
#Inside the dialog box, choose the character from the available fonts and click {{Menu|OK}}.

{{Note|Note: Different fonts include different special characters. Utilize the font selection to search for specific characters.}}

== Non-breaking spaces and hyphens ==

A non-breaking space (NBSP) or non-breaking hyphen tells Writer to never break lines at that spot. A non-breaking space or hyphen can never end or begin an automatically wrapped line. Use non-breaking spaces to prevent periods at the end of lines that do not terminate sentences, or numbers or bullet-like symbols at the beginning of lines that do not initiate list items. Use a non-breaking hyphen to prevent the hyphen from appearing at the end of a line, such as in a phone number.

'''Insert a non-breaking space'''

Place the cursor between the two words, and press {{Key|Control|Space}}.

'''Insert a non-breaking hyphen'''

Place the cursor where the hyphen will appear, and press {{Key|Shift|Control|-}}.

== En and em dashes ==

To use en and em dashes, the '''Replace dashes''' option must be checked under {{Menu|Tools|AutoCorrect Options}}. With this option enabled, Writer will replace two hyphens, under certain conditions, with the corresponding dash.

In the following table, the A and B represent text consisting of letters A to Z or digits 0 to 9. The table describes the different en and em dash options.

{| style="border-spacing:0; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto"
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">Text that you type:</span></big>
! style="text-align:left;background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:0.035cm solid #000000;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">Result</span></big>

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A - B (A, space, minus, space, B)
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B)

|-
|style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A -- B (A, space, minus, minus, space, B)
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B)

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A--B (A, minus, minus, B)
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A—B (A, em-dash, B)

|-
|style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A-B (A, minus, B)
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A-B (unchanged)

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A -B (A, space, minus, B)
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A -B (unchanged)

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A --B (A, space, minus, minus, B)
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A –B (A, space, en-dash, B)
|}

En or em dashes can also be inserted manually through {{Menu|Insert|Special Characters}}, use characters U+2013 or U-2014.

There are also shortcuts available to insert en or em dashes, that vary per operating system.

{| style="border-spacing:0; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto"
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">Operating System</span></big>
! style="text-align:left;background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">En dash shortcut</span></big>
! style="text-align:left;background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:0.035cm solid #000000;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">Em dash shortcut</span></big>

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Windows
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| {{Key|Alt}} + 0150
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| {{Key|Alt}} + 0151

|-
|style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Linux
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| ''Compose'' + two hyphens + a period
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| ''Compose'' + three hyphens + a period

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| macOS
| style="background-color:#transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| {{Key|Option}} + hyphen
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:0.002cm solid #000000;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| {{Key|Shift|Option}} + hyphen
|}

= Formatting Paragraphs =
Formatting paragraphs in Writer can be achieved through alignment, justified text, line spacing, numbering or bullets, and indenting. These actions can be performed using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar. The below image shows the Formatting toolbar with the paragraph specific icons displayed.

{{Note|Note: You can use paragraph styles rather than manually formatting paragraphs, especially for long documents.}}

[[Image:Writer-formatting-paragraph-icons.jpg]]

{| class="prettytable"
|-
|width="200pt"| '''1''' Open the Styles and
|width="200pt"| '''5''' Align Right
|width="200pt"| '''10''' Numbering On/Off
|-
| Formatting Window
| '''6''' Justified
| '''11''' Bullets On/Off
|-
| '''2''' Apply Style
| '''7''' Line Spacing: 1
| '''12''' Decrease Indent
|-
| '''3''' Align Left
| '''8''' Line Spacing: 1.5
| '''13''' Increase Indent
|-
| '''4''' Centered
| '''9''' Line Spacing: 2
| '''14''' Paragraph
|}

== Aligned and justified text ==

Text can be aligned to the left, center, or right of the document. The below image shows how text appears with the different alignment options.

[[Image:Writer-aligned-text-example.jpg]]

When using justified text, the last line by default is aligned to the left. You can also align the last line to the center, or justify the last line. These options are controlled in the Alignment tab from {{Menu|Format|Paragraph}}.

[[Image:Writer-justified-text-example.jpg]]

== Tab stops and indents ==

The ruler displays the default and defined tab stops. The tab settings affect the indentation of paragraphs. You can manually change the indentation of paragraphs with the Increase Indent or Decrease Indent icons, or by using the {{Key|Tab}} key.

Tab and indent settings are discussed in the Ruler section of [[Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Intro/Content|Writer's User Interface]].

= Formatting characters =

Formatting characters in Writer can be achieved through adjustments to the font family, font weight, font size, or font coloring. These actions can be performed using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar. The below image shows the Formatting toolbar with the character specific icons displayed.

{{Note|Note: You can use character styles rather than manually formatting characters, especially for long documents.}}

[[Image: Writer-formatting-characters.jpg]]

{| class="prettytable"
|-
|width="200pt"| '''1''' Open the Styles and
|width="200pt"| '''6''' Italic
|width="200pt"| '''12''' Font Color
|-
| Formatting Window
| '''7''' Underline
| '''13''' Highlighting
|-
| '''2''' Apply Style
| '''8''' Superscript
| '''14''' Background color
|-
| '''3''' Font Name
| '''9''' Subscript
| '''15''' Open Character Format
|-
| '''4''' Font Size
| '''10''' Increase Font
| dialog box
|-
| '''5''' Bold
| '''11''' Reduce Font
|
|}

= Autoformatting text =

Writer will automatically format parts of your document, according to the options selected in the AutoCorrect dialog box ({{Menu|Tools|AutoCorrect Options}}).

[[Image:Writer-Autocorrect-options-dialog-box.jpg|500px|500px]]

Inside the AutoCorrect Options dialog box, the Help button will open and describe the selected choice and how to activate the autoformats.

To automatically format your document with the selected options, select or deselect from the submenu in {{Menu|Format|AutoCorrect}}.

'''While Typing'''

The default option, automatically formats the document while you type.

'''Apply'''

After choosing this option, Writer will automatically format the document.

'''Apply and Edit Changes'''

After choosing this option, Writer will automatically format the document and then open a dialog box where you can accept or reject changes.

'''AutoCorrect Options'''

Open the AutoCorrect dialog box.

= Using footnotes and endnotes =

Footnotes and endnotes are a type of note that comment on or cites a reference for a designed part of the text. Footnotes are printed at the bottom of the page for which they are referenced, and endnotes are printed at the end of the document.

== Inserting footnotes and endnotes ==

Place the cursor where you want the footnote or endnote to appear. Select {{Menu|Insert|Footnote/Endnote}} or click on the Insert Footnote/Endnote Directly icon [[Image:Writer-insert-footenote_endnote-icon.jpg]] or the Insert Endnote Directly icon [[Image:Writer-insert-endnote-icon.jpg]] from the Insert toolbar ({{Menu|View|Toolbars|Insert}}).

If you use {{Menu|Insert|Footnote/Endnote}}, the Insert Footnote/Endnote dialog box is displayed. From here you can choose the type of numbering sequence and whether to insert a footnote or an endnote.

[[Image:Writer-Insert-footnote_endnote-box.jpg]]

The footnote or endnote will be inserted into the text, and the cursor relocated to the footnote or endnote area at the end of the page/document. You can then type the footnote/endnote content in this area.

To delete a footnote or endnote, simply delete the appropriate marker. The contents of the footnote/endnote will be automatically deleted and the numbering of the other footnotes and endnotes is adjusted automatically.

== Defining the format of footnotes and endnotes ==

To format footnotes or endnotes, select {{Menu|Tools|Footnotes/Endnotes}}. Choose from numbering and styles settings and click '''OK'''.

[[Image:Writer-footnotes_endnotes-settings.jpg|500px|500px]]

= Checking spelling and grammar =

Writer provides a spelling checker that offers two functions:

* The AutoSpellcheck [[Image:Writer-AutoSpellcheck-icon.jpg]] checks each word as it is typed and displays a wavy red line under misspelled words. When the spelling error is corrected the red wavy line disappears.
* The spelling check [[Image:Writer-Spellcheck-icon.jpg]] performs a separate spelling check on the document when you click on the icon. The spellcheck reviews the document and opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog box if misspelled words are found. The spelling check starts at the current cursor position and advances to the end of the document. You can choose to continue the spellcheck from the beginning of the document.

Additional features of the spelling checker:

* Right click on a word with the wavy underline to open a contextual menu. You can select from suggested words and the selection will replace the misspelled word.

[[Image:Writer-Spellcheck-contextual-menu.jpg|300px]]

* Within the Spelling and Grammar dialog box you can change the dictionary language by choosing from the drop down menu in the '''Text Language''' field. Add a word to a dictionary by selecting a word, click '''Add''' and choose the dictionary to add it to.

[[Image:Writer-Spellcheck.jpg|500px|500px]]

* For more spelling check options, click '''Options''' in the Spelling and Grammar dialog box. You can choose from several options including whether to check uppercase words or words with numbers. You can also manage your dictionaries, add or delete dictionaries and add or delete words in your dictionaries.

[[Image:WRiter-Spellcheck-Options.jpg|500px|500px]]

Writer does not include a grammar checker but you can install an extension such as the LanguageTool.

= Using built-in language tools =

The document language determines the dictionary used for spellcheck, thesaurus, and hyphenation, as well as the decimal and thousands delimiter and the default currency format. Within the document you can apply a separate language to any paragraph style. This language has priority over the language for the whole document. You can also assign a language to selected pieces of text in a paragraph, by direct formatting or character style. This language has priority over the paragraph style and document language.

Writer provides some tools that allow you to mix multiple languages within the same document, or easily switch languages for your documents. This can be accomplished through:

* Language settings in Options
* Paragraph and character styles
* Using the {{Menu|Tools|Language}} menu
* Using the status bar

== Using language settings in Options ==
Using the language settings in Options allows you to set the language of the whole document.

# Select {{Menu|Tools|Options}} and go to {{Menu|Language Settings|Languages}}.
# Under '''Default languages for documents''', select the document language (this will be applied to newly created documents).
# If you want to change the language for the current document only, select the ''For the current document only'' option.

[[Image:Writer-Options-Default-Language.jpg]]

== Using paragraph and character styles ==

Selecting a language for paragraph style:
# Place the cursor within the paragraph that you want to edit.
# Right click to open the context menu and select '''Edit Paragraph Style'''.
# Inside the Paragraph Style dialog box select the Font tab.
# Select the language to use and click '''OK'''.

Selecting a language for selected text:
# Place the cursor within the text that you want to edit.
# Choose {{Menu|Format|Character}}.
# Inside the Character Style dialog box select the Font tab.
# Select the language to use and click '''OK'''.

== Using the {{Menu|Tools|Language}} menu ==
You can set the language for the document, paragraph or characters from {{Menu|Tools|Language}} on the menu bar.

'''For Selection''': Applies language to the selected text.

'''For Paragraph''': Applies language to the selected paragraph.

'''For all Text''': Applies language to the entire document.

[[Image:Writer-Tools-Language.jpg]]

== Using the status bar ==
Change the language of the paragraph or the entire document from the status bar.
# Click on the language in the status bar to pop up a menu of choices.
# Choosing '''Reset to Default Language''' will return the paragraph or entire document to the default language set in {{Menu|Tool|Options}}.

[[Image:Writer-Statusbar-language.jpg]]

=Using synonyms and the thesaurus=

To access a list of synonyms from the context menu:
#Select a word, right click to open the contextual menu.
#Under '''Synonyms''' will be a submenu of alternative words.
#Click on the word to replace it with the selected word in the document.

[[Image:Writer-context-menu-synonyms.jpg|300px]]

To access the thesaurus, which contains a more extensive list of synonyms:
#Select a word or phrase.
#Choose {{Menu|Tools|Language|Thesaurus}} or {{Key|Control|F7}} or right click and choose {{Menu|Synonyms|Thesaurus}}.
#Choose from the words in the dialog box to replace.

[[Image:Writer-thesaurus.jpg|400px]]

= Hyphenating words =
You can use hyphenation in Writer automatically (Writer uses hyphenation dictionaries) or manually (inserting conditional hyphens where necessary).

== Automatic hyphenation ==
#Open the '''Styles and Formatting''' window (click on the Styles and Formatting icon [[Image:Writer-styles-formatting-icon.jpg]] or press {{Key|Control|T}}.
#Under the Paragraph Styles page, right click on '''Default''' and select '''Modify'''.
#In the Paragraph Style dialog box, select the '''Text Flow''' tab.
#Under '''Hyphenation''', select or deselect the '''Automatically''' option, click OK to save.

[[Image:Writer-paragraph-styles-textflow.jpg|500px]]

You can set hyphenation choices through {{Menu|Tools|Options|Languages|Settings - Writing Aids}} in Options near the bottom of the box, scroll down to find the hyphenation settings.

To change the minimum number of characters for hyphenation, number of characters before a line break, or the number of characters after a line break, select the item and click the {{Button|Edit}} button.

'''Hyphenation without inquiry''' specifies that you will not be asked to manually hyphenate words that the hyphenation dictionary does not recognize. If this box is not selected, when a word is not recognized a dialog box will open where you can manually enter hyphens.

'''Hyphenate special regions''' specifies that hyphenation will be carried out in footnotes, headers and footers.

[[Image:Writer-options-writing-aids.jpg|600px]]

== Manual hyphenation ==

It is recommended to not use a normal hyphen, which remains visible at all times, even if the word is no longer at the end of a line when you add or delete text or change formatting.

Instead it is recommended to use a conditional hyphen. To insert a conditional hyphen inside a word, click where you want the hyphen to appear and press {{Key|Control|hyphen}}. The hyphen will only appear when it is at the end of the line, even if automatic hyphenation is turned off.

= Word completion =

The word completion feature in writer tries to guess the word you are typing and offers to complete the word for you. If word completion is enabled, you will see the completed word highlighted as you type. To accept the suggestion, press {{Key|Enter}}. Otherwise continue typing and the suggestion will disappear.

To enable or disabled word completion, select {{Menu|Tools|AutoCorrect Options|Word Completion|Enable Word Completion}}.

Additionally, you can customize Writer's word completion settings with the following options:

*'''Append space''': Adds space automatically after an accepted word.
*'''Show as tip''': Shows the suggested word as a tip (hovering over the word in a box) rather than completing the word as you type.
*'''Collect words''': Collects the words used in word completion when working on a document to save for later use in other documents.
*'''Accept with''': Changes the key that accepts a suggested entry.
*'''Min. word length''': Changes the length of the smallest words to be remembered.
*'''Max. entries''': Changes the maximum number of words remembered.
*'''Delete entry''': Deletes specific entries from the word completion list.

[[Image:Writer-word-completion-menu.jpg|500px]]

= Line numbering =

Line numbering adds line numbers in the margin of the document.

[[Image:Writer-line-numbering-example.jpg]]

To enable line numbering, choose {{Menu|Tools|Line Numbering}} and select the '''Show Numbering''' option, click OK.

In the Line Numbering dialog box you can choose the style, format, and position of the numbering, as well as the spacing and numbering intervals of the numbering.

[[Image:Writer-line-numbering-menu.jpg|500px]]

= Tracking changes =

To keep track of changes made in a document you may:
*Make changes to a copy of the document, and use Writer to compare the changes made between the original and the copy.
*Enable change marks, that show where you have added or deleted material or changed formatting. You can review and accept or reject each of the changes.

== Recording changes ==
#Select {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Record}}. To show or hide the display of changes select {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Show}}.
#To include a comment with the change, place the cursor in the area of the change, and choose {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Comment}}. When hovering over the change, a ''Help Tip'' will display the type of change, the author, date and time of the change. If you want a comment to also display in the tip, make sure you have ''Extended Tips'' enabled ({{Menu|Tools|Options|OpenOffice|General}} and select '''Extended tips''').
#To stop recording changes, select {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Record}} to deselect the tracking.

[[Image:Writer-tracking-changes-comment.jpg]]

== Accepting or rejecting changes ==

To accept or reject the recorded changes, you can use the right click context menu, or the Accept or Reject Changes dialog box.

The results of accepting or rejecting changes are:
*Accepting an insertion removes the marked change color from the inserted text.
*Rejecting an insertion removes the text from the document.
*Accepting a deletion removes the text from the document.
*Rejecting a deletion removes the change indicator and restores the text to the document.

'''Right click context menu'''
#Right click inside a recorded change
#In the context menu, choose '''Accept Change''' or '''Reject Change'''.

'''Accept or Reject Changes dialog box'''
#Select {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Accept or Reject}}. This will open the Accept or Reject Changes dialog box.
#Changes that have not yet been accepted or rejected are displayed. Selecting a change in the dialog box highlights the change in the document, so you can see what the editor changed.
#Choose '''Accept''' or '''Reject''' to accept or reject the selected change. You can choose '''Accept All''' or '''Reject All''' to accept or reject all changes without review.
#To show only the changes made by certain people, or changes made under other restrictions, use the ''Filter'' tab. Specify filter criteria and return to the ''List'' tab to view changes.

[[Image:Writer-tracking-changes-review.jpg|500px]]

== Merging modified documents ==
Sometimes multiple reviewers will return the edited version of a document at the same time. In this case, you may want to review all changes of the document at once. For this purpose you can merge documents in Writer.

#Open one of the modified copies.
#Choose {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Merge Document}}. Select another copy of the document to merge.
#The Accept or Reject Changes dialog box will open, showing changes by one than one reviewer. If you want to merge more documents, close the dialog box and repeat step 2.
#All recorded changes are now included in the open copy. To preserve, save this file under another name.

== Comparing documents ==
Sometimes reviewers may not track changes they make in a document. In Writer you can find the changes if you compare the documents. You must have the original document and the edited document.

#Open the edited document. Select {{Menu|Edit|Compare Document}}.
#Select the original document and choose '''Insert'''.
#Changes will be marked and the Accept or Reject Changes dialog box will be displayed. You can choose to accept or reject changes as described in the above section.

= Comments =

Writer provides another type of comments, that appear to the side of the document page, and look like "sticky notes". These comments allow authors and reviewers to exchange ideas, ask for suggestions or brainstorm during review.

To insert a comment, place the cursor in the place the comment refers to and select {{Menu|Insert|Comment}}, or press {{Key|Control|Alt|N}}. The comment will be anchored to the reference point by a dotted line, and displayed in a box to the right hand side of the page where you can type the text of the comment.

The comment box will show the author's name and time stamp indicating when the comment was created. If more than one person edits the document, each author is allocated a different comment background color.

Clicking on the menu arrow icon of the comment displays a drop-down menu where you can delete the current comment, all the comments from the same author, or all the comments in the document. Right clicking on the comment gives further options to apply basic formatting changes to the comment.

You can navigate from one comment to another using the Navigator. With the Navigator open, expand the comments section and select the comment text to move to the anchor point of the comment. You can also edit or delete comments from the Navigator by right clicking on the comment text and selecting {{Menu|Comment|Edit}} or {{Menu|Delete}}.

= Word Count =

Select text and choose {{Menu|Tools|Word Count}}. The word count dialog box will display the number of words and characters in the selection, as well as the number of words in the document.

= Changing Case =

To change the case of a selection, choose {{Menu|Format|Change case}} and choose from the following:

*''Sentence case'': only the first word is capitalized (and proper nouns)
*''lower case'': no words are capitalized (except proper nouns)
*''UPPER CASE'': all letters are capitalized
*''Capitalize Every Word'': every word is capitalized
*''tOGGLE cASE'': changes every letter to the opposite case

[[Category:Documentation]] [[Category:Documentation/Writer]]

Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Text

2026-06-06T13:59:05Z

DiGro: /* Using regular expressions (wildcards) */

{{DraftPage|EN}}

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Working with Text}}

In Writer, you can use the toolbars, the sidebar and menus (normal and contextual) to modify text. For example, modify the selected paragraph through {{Menu|Format|Paragraph}} (choose {{Menu|Character}} to format text). Alternatively, right click the selection and choose {{Menu|Paragraph}} or {{Menu|Character}}.

Formatting tools are available through the Format menu or a right click on the page. But it is important to note that these options only modify the corresponding page style. ''In Writer there is no direct formatting for pages, page formatting can only be done through styles''. For this reason, we will leave the details on how to format pages to the corresponding section for page styles.

= Selecting Text =

In Writer, in order to work with text, you need to select it. Selecting a piece of text, or consecutive pieces of text, is relatively simple.

Using the cursor, left click the text, and drag until the desired text is selected. You can also use selection shortcuts by left clicking the text. Single words can be selected with a double left click, a sentence selected with a triple left click, and a paragraph selected with a quadruple left click.

With the keyboard, use the navigation arrows to choose the text, hold down the {{Key|Shift}} key and select text area with the arrow keys.

[[Image:Writer-consecutive-selection-text-border.png]]

To quickly select content on the entire page, press {{Key|Control|A}}, or go to {{Menu|Edit|Select All}}.

== Selecting items that are not consecutive ==

# Using the cursor, select the first piece of text.
# Hold down the {{Key|Control}} key (continue holding until all selections are complete), and use the cursor to select the next piece of text.
# Repeat until all selections are made.

[[Image:Writer-unconsecutive-selection-text-border.png]]

== Selecting a vertical block of text ==

Text may be separated by spaces or tabs in a vertical block. To select text in this form, change the selection mode to block by choosing {{Menu|Edit|Selection Mode|Block Area}} or left click on STD in the status bar until it changes to BLK.

[[Image:Writer-status-bar-block-mode-border.png]]

Now you can make your selection as you would with consecutive text selection.

[[Image:Writer-block-selection-text-border.png]]

= Cutting, copying and pasting text =

Text can be moved within a document, or between documents by cutting or copying and subsequently pasting the text.

Cutting text entails removing it entirely and relocating it within the document. Copying text creates a duplicate to be placed within the document.

To cut or copy (with text selected) you can use:
*''Keyboard shortcuts'': {{Key|Control|X}} (cut) or {{Key|Control|C}} (copy)
*''Menu selections'': {{Menu|Edit|Cut}} or {{Menu|Edit|Copy}}
*''Contextual menus'': Right click text selection and choose {{Menu|Cut}} or {{Menu|Copy}}
*''Icon sources'': [[Image:Writer-cut-icon.png]] Cut or [[Image:Writer-copy-icon.png]] Copy

Pasting text places the cut or copied text in the document. When pasting text, the formatting result depends on the source and how you paste it.

To paste and retain original formatting use:
*''Keyboard shortcut'': {{Key|Control|V}}
*''Menu selection'': {{Menu|Edit|Paste}}
*''Contextual menu'': Right click and choose {{Menu|Paste}}
*''Icon source'': [[Image:Writer-paste-icon.png]] Paste

To paste and take on formatting of the surrounding text:
*Choose the arrow to the right of the paste icon, and choose {{Menu|Unformatted text}}
[[Image:Writer-paste-icon-menu.png]]
*Select {{Menu|Edit|Paste Special|Unformatted text}}

For other paste formatting options, choose from the drop down menu of the paste icon or the Paste Special dialog box.

[[Image:Writer-Paste-Special-dialog-box.png|600px|500px]]

= Numbered and bulleted lists =

There are several ways to create numbered or bulleted lists:
* Auto-formatting (covered later in this chapter)
* List Styles (covered in the chapter on Styles)
* The Numbering [[Image:Writer-numbering-icon.jpg]] and Bullets [[Image:Writer-bullets-icon.jpg]] icons on the paragraph formatting toolbar. The use of these icons will be described in the section below.

{{Warn|It is important to note that it is better to avoid the use of numbered list in numbered chapters. In another section of this guide we will see how to number chapters and give an outline to a document.}}

To produce a numbered or bulleted list, select the paragraphs in the list and choose the appropriate icon.

[[Image:Writer-create-numbered-list.jpg]]

==Using the Bullets and Numbering Toolbar==

With a numbered or bulleted list active, a contextual toolbar will open.

[[File:AOO-BulletNumbering.png]]

The buttons, numbered on the screenshot, perform the following actions:

# Bullets ON/OFF
# Numbering ON/OFF
# Numbering OFF
# Promote one level
# Demote one level
# Promote one level with sub-points
# Demote one level with sub-points
# Insert an unnumbered entry
# Move line up
# Move line down
# Move line up with sub-points
# Move line down with sub-points
# Restart numbering
# Bullets and Numbering dialog box

The options in the Bullets and Numbering dialog box are the same as when editing a list style, so these properties will be covered in the chapter on List Styles.

==Nested Lists==

As mentioned earlier, list sub-points refer to the levels of a numbered list or bullet, see example below:

# First
## Sub First
# Second
## Sub Second
### Sub Sub Second

To change the level of one line in the list, either use the {{Menu|Promote/Demote Level}} [[Image:Writer-promote-or-demote-icons.jpg]] icons in the Bullets and Numbering toolbar, or place the cursor at the beginning of the line and press {{Key|TAB}} or {{Key|Shift|TAB}}.

=AutoText=

Use AutoText to insert text, tables, fields and other items for reuse, by assigning a key combination to the item for retrieval.

For example, by typing ''dt'' and {{Key|F3}}, a long paragraph with a sample text will insert into the document (note: ''dt'' stands for ''dummy text'' and different acronyms may apply to non-English versions: use {{Menu|Edit|AutoText}} to see the one appropriate for your language). Typing ''fn'' and {{Key|F3}} will produce a table with one row and two columns, with a Math object on the left cell and a variable on the other.

Both examples show what AutoText does and its use, which is to introduce a document snip previously defined in any place using only an abbreviation and a keyboard shortcut.

== Inserting an AutoText ==

Insert an AutoText by typing the abbreviation followed by {{Key|F3}}.

To view the available abbreviations, you can choose {{Menu|Edit|AutoText}} ({{Key|Ctrl|F3}}), but an easier method is [[Documentation/UserGuide/UI#Toolbars|activating the Insert toolbar]]. With the toolbar active choose the AutoText icon [[Image:Writer-Insert-toolbar-autotext.png]]. You can now view the AutoText categories and their respective abbreviations.

[[File:AOO-InsertAutoText.png|600px]]

== Defining an AutoText ==

# Select the content you want to use for an AutoText. The content can be anything: text, tables, pictures, frames, sections, etc.
# With the content selected, go to {{Menu|Edit|AutoText}}.
# The AutoText dialog box will appear. Provide a name for your entry in the ''Name'' box. Writer will suggest a shortcut, which you can change.
# In the box to the left, choose a category for the entry, where the AutoText will be classified.
# Select the {{Button|AutoText}} button to the right, and select either {{Menu|New (text only)}} (for the AutoText to take on formatting where it is inserted into the document) or {{Menu|New}} (for the AutoText to retain its formatting).
# Select {{Button|Close}} to return to the document.

{{Warn|If the AutoText contains a table, it is necessary to select at least one line before and one line after the table, otherwise only the content and not the table itself will go into the AutoText.}}

[[File:AOO-AutoText.png|600px]]

Inside the AutoText dialog box, note the following features:

* With the option {{Menu|Display remainder of the name as suggestion while typing}} enabled, Writer will suggest an AutoText if you start to type the AutoText name. The suggestion will appear in a pop-up box, and pressing {{Key|Enter}} will insert the AutoText.
* The {{Button|Categories...}} button allows you to create new categories to classify your AutoTexts.
* {{Button|Path...}} defines where to save the AutoTexts.

== Editing an AutoText ==

In the AutoText dialog box ({{Menu|Edit|AutoText}}), you can edit your AutoText entries.

Select an existing AutoText, and choose the {{Menu|AutoText...}} button to modify or even eliminate the AutoText.

Selecting {{Menu|Edit}}, a document will open with the AutoText. Simply make the changes and save. The entry will now be available as edited.

{{Warn|The changes will apply only to AutoTexts inserted after the modification, AutoText already inserted will not be changed}}

==Print a list of AutoText entries==

# Choose {{Menu|Tools|Macros|Organize Macros|OpenOffice Basics}}.
# In the ''Macro from'' list, choose {{Menu|OpenOffice Macros|Gimmicks}}.
# Select {{Menu|AutoText}} and click {{Button|Run}}.
# A list of the AutoText entries will be generated in a new document. You can print this document.

= Find and replace text =

You can find text within a document with the Find toolbar, or the Find & Replace dialog box. In the Find & Replace dialog box, you also have the ability to:
*Find and replace words or phrases
*Find and replace specific formatting
*Find and replace paragraph styles
*Use regular expressions to find and replace text

The Find toolbar [[Image:Writer-Find-Toolbar.png]] will only allow you to search for and identify specific text or phrases. You can find the toolbar docked in the standard toolbar, or by choosing {{Menu|View|Toolbars|Find}}.

Display the Find & Replace dialog box by pressing {{Key|Control|F}} or choosing {{Menu|Edit|Find & Replace}}.

[[Image:Writer-Find-and-Replace-box.png|500px|400px]]

#Type the text you want to search for in the ''Search for'' box.
#To replace the text, type the new text in the ''Replace with'' box.
#To find text, click '''Find'''. To replace, click '''Replace'''. Choosing '''Find All''' will select all instances of the text. Selecting '''Replace All''' will replace all matches.
#You can choose from several search options such as matching case, matching whole words, or searching for similar words.

== Find and replace specific formatting ==

To quickly change the format of text from one style to another:

#Choose the {{Menu|More Options}} button to expand the dialog box and view the formatting options.
#To search for text with specific formatting, enter the text in the ''Search for'' box. To only search for formatting leave the ''Search for'' box empty.
#With the ''Search for'' box selected, choose {{Menu|Format}}.
#Select the formatting options to include and click {{Menu|OK}}.
#To replace with different text and/or formatting, perform the same actions for the ''Replace with'' box.
#Choose '''Find''', '''Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

== Find and replace paragraph styles ==

To quickly change paragraph styles from one style to another:

#Choose the {{Menu|More Options}} button to expand the dialog box.
#Select {{Menu|Search for Styles}} (if you have attributes specified this option is labeled as {{Menu|Including Styles}}).
#Select styles from the ''Search for'' and ''Replace with'' drop down menus.
#Choose '''Find''', '''Find All''', '''Replace''', or '''Replace All'''.

{{Note|Note: You can only select one style at a time}}

== Using regular expressions (wildcards) ==

Regular expressions (also known as wildcards) are combinations of characters that instruct Writer how to search for something.

#Choose the {{Menu|More Options}} button to expand the dialog box.
#Select the {{Menu|Regular expressions}} option.
#Type the search text with the regular expression and the replacement text if any.
#Choose {{button|Find}}, {{button|Find All}}, {{button|Replace}}, or {{button|Replace All}}.

Examples of common regular expressions:
{| style="border-spacing:0; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto"
! style="background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">To Find</span></big>
! style="text-align:center;background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">Use</span></big>
! style="text-align:left;background-color:#0e85cd;border-top:0.035cm solid #000000;border-bottom:0.035cm solid #000000;border-left:0.035cm solid #000000;border-right:0.035cm solid #000000;padding:0.15cm;" | <big><span style="color:white">Examples</span></big>

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Any single character
| style="text-align:center;background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| .
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| b<span style="color:red">.</span>d finds b<span style="color:red">a</span>d, b<span style="color:red">u</span>d, b<span style="color:red">i</span>d, b<span style="color:red">e</span>d

|-
|style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| One of the specified characters
| style="text-align:center;background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| [xyz]
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| b<span style="color:red">[iu]</span>n finds b<span style="color:red">i</span>n and b<span style="color:red">u</span>n

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"|Any single character in this range
| style="text-align:center;background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| [x-y]
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| <span style="color:red">[r-t]</span>eed finds <span style="color:red">r</span>eed, <span style="color:red">s</span>eed, and <span style="color:red">t</span>eed<br />(range must be in alphabetically ascending order)

|-
|style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Any single character except the characters inside the bracket
| style="text-align:center;background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| [^x]
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| p<span style="color:red">[^a]</span>t finds p<span style="color:red">o</span>st and p<span style="color:red">e</span>st but not past

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"|The beginning of a word
| style="text-align:center;background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| \<start
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| <span style="color:red">\<log</span> finds <span style="color:red">log</span>book and <span style="color:red">log</span>istics but not catalog

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| The end of a word
| style="text-align:center;background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| end\>
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;" | <span style="color:red">log\></span> finds cata<span style="color:red">log</span> but not logistics

|-
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"|A paragraph marker
| style="text-align:center;background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| $
| style="background-color:transparent;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Does not work as a replacement character, use \n instead

|-
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| A line break
| style="text-align:center;background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| \n
| style="background-color:#cfe7f5;border-top:none;border-bottom:0.002cm solid #000000;border-left:0.002cm solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0.199cm;padding-bottom:0.101cm;padding-left:0.101cm;padding-right:0.101cm;"| Finds a line break that was inserted with {{Key|Shift|Enter}},<br />as a replacement character it inserts a paragraph marker
|}

To view a full list of regular expressions, select {{Menu|Help|OpenOffice Help}} and search for regular expressions, choose '''list of''' to display the list.

= Inserting special characters =

A special character is one that is not found on the standard keyboard. For example, ₵ ə Σ ẽ ψ are all special characters.

To insert a special character:
#Place the cursor in the document where you want the character to appear.
#Select {{Menu|Insert|Special Character}} for the Special Character dialog box.
#Inside the dialog box, choose the character from the available fonts and click {{Menu|OK}}.

{{Note|Note: Different fonts include different special characters. Utilize the font selection to search for specific characters.}}

== Non-breaking spaces and hyphens ==

A non-breaking space (NBSP) or non-breaking hyphen tells Writer to never break lines at that spot. A non-breaking space or hyphen can never end or begin an automatically wrapped line. Use non-breaking spaces to prevent periods at the end of lines that do not terminate sentences, or numbers or bullet-like symbols at the beginning of lines that do not initiate list items. Use a non-breaking hyphen to prevent the hyphen from appearing at the end of a line, such as in a phone number.

'''Insert a non-breaking space'''

Place the cursor between the two words, and press {{Key|Control|Space}}.

'''Insert a non-breaking hyphen'''

Place the cursor where the hyphen will appear, and press {{Key|Shift|Control|-}}.

== En and em dashes ==

To use en and em dashes, the '''Replace dashes''' option must be checked under {{Menu|Tools|AutoCorrect Options}}. With this option enabled, Writer will replace two hyphens, under certain conditions, with the corresponding dash.

In the following table, the A and B represent text consisting of letters A to Z or digits 0 to 9. The table describes the different en and em dash options.

{| class="wikitable" border="1"
|width="300px"| '''Text that you type:'''
|width="300px"| '''Result'''
|-
| A - B (A, space, minus, space, B)
| A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B)
|-
| A -- B (A, space, minus, minus, space, B)
| A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B)
|-
| A--B (A, minus, minus, B)
| A—B (A, em-dash, B)
|-
| A-B (A, minus, B)
| A-B (unchanged)
|-
| A -B (A, space, minus, B)
| A -B (unchanged)
|-
| A --B (A, space, minus, minus, B)
| A –B (A, space, en-dash, B)

|}

En or em dashes can also be inserted manually through {{Menu|Insert|Special Characters}}, use characters U+2013 or U-2014.

There are also shortcuts available to insert en or em dashes, that vary per operating system.

{| class="wikitable" border="1"
|-
|width="150px"| '''Operating System'''
|width="250px"| '''En dash shortcut'''
|width="250px"| '''Em dash shortcut'''
|-
| Windows
| {{Key|Alt}} + 0150
| {{Key|Alt}} + 0151
|-
| Linux
| ''Compose'' + two hyphens + a period
| ''Compose'' + three hyphens + a period
|-
| Mac
| {{Key|Option}} + hyphen
| {{Key|Shift|Option}} + hyphen
|}

= Formatting Paragraphs =
Formatting paragraphs in Writer can be achieved through alignment, justified text, line spacing, numbering or bullets, and indenting. These actions can be performed using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar. The below image shows the Formatting toolbar with the paragraph specific icons displayed.

{{Note|Note: You can use paragraph styles rather than manually formatting paragraphs, especially for long documents.}}

[[Image:Writer-formatting-paragraph-icons.jpg]]

{| class="prettytable"
|-
|width="200pt"| '''1''' Open the Styles and
|width="200pt"| '''5''' Align Right
|width="200pt"| '''10''' Numbering On/Off
|-
| Formatting Window
| '''6''' Justified
| '''11''' Bullets On/Off
|-
| '''2''' Apply Style
| '''7''' Line Spacing: 1
| '''12''' Decrease Indent
|-
| '''3''' Align Left
| '''8''' Line Spacing: 1.5
| '''13''' Increase Indent
|-
| '''4''' Centered
| '''9''' Line Spacing: 2
| '''14''' Paragraph
|}

== Aligned and justified text ==

Text can be aligned to the left, center, or right of the document. The below image shows how text appears with the different alignment options.

[[Image:Writer-aligned-text-example.jpg]]

When using justified text, the last line by default is aligned to the left. You can also align the last line to the center, or justify the last line. These options are controlled in the Alignment tab from {{Menu|Format|Paragraph}}.

[[Image:Writer-justified-text-example.jpg]]

== Tab stops and indents ==

The ruler displays the default and defined tab stops. The tab settings affect the indentation of paragraphs. You can manually change the indentation of paragraphs with the Increase Indent or Decrease Indent icons, or by using the {{Key|Tab}} key.

Tab and indent settings are discussed in the Ruler section of [[Documentation/UserGuide/Writer/Intro/Content|Writer's User Interface]].

= Formatting characters =

Formatting characters in Writer can be achieved through adjustments to the font family, font weight, font size, or font coloring. These actions can be performed using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar. The below image shows the Formatting toolbar with the character specific icons displayed.

{{Note|Note: You can use character styles rather than manually formatting characters, especially for long documents.}}

[[Image: Writer-formatting-characters.jpg]]

{| class="prettytable"
|-
|width="200pt"| '''1''' Open the Styles and
|width="200pt"| '''6''' Italic
|width="200pt"| '''12''' Font Color
|-
| Formatting Window
| '''7''' Underline
| '''13''' Highlighting
|-
| '''2''' Apply Style
| '''8''' Superscript
| '''14''' Background color
|-
| '''3''' Font Name
| '''9''' Subscript
| '''15''' Open Character Format
|-
| '''4''' Font Size
| '''10''' Increase Font
| dialog box
|-
| '''5''' Bold
| '''11''' Reduce Font
|
|}

= Autoformatting text =

Writer will automatically format parts of your document, according to the options selected in the AutoCorrect dialog box ({{Menu|Tools|AutoCorrect Options}}).

[[Image:Writer-Autocorrect-options-dialog-box.jpg|500px|500px]]

Inside the AutoCorrect Options dialog box, the Help button will open and describe the selected choice and how to activate the autoformats.

To automatically format your document with the selected options, select or deselect from the submenu in {{Menu|Format|AutoCorrect}}.

'''While Typing'''

The default option, automatically formats the document while you type.

'''Apply'''

After choosing this option, Writer will automatically format the document.

'''Apply and Edit Changes'''

After choosing this option, Writer will automatically format the document and then open a dialog box where you can accept or reject changes.

'''AutoCorrect Options'''

Open the AutoCorrect dialog box.

= Using footnotes and endnotes =

Footnotes and endnotes are a type of note that comment on or cites a reference for a designed part of the text. Footnotes are printed at the bottom of the page for which they are referenced, and endnotes are printed at the end of the document.

== Inserting footnotes and endnotes ==

Place the cursor where you want the footnote or endnote to appear. Select {{Menu|Insert|Footnote/Endnote}} or click on the Insert Footnote/Endnote Directly icon [[Image:Writer-insert-footenote_endnote-icon.jpg]] or the Insert Endnote Directly icon [[Image:Writer-insert-endnote-icon.jpg]] from the Insert toolbar ({{Menu|View|Toolbars|Insert}}).

If you use {{Menu|Insert|Footnote/Endnote}}, the Insert Footnote/Endnote dialog box is displayed. From here you can choose the type of numbering sequence and whether to insert a footnote or an endnote.

[[Image:Writer-Insert-footnote_endnote-box.jpg]]

The footnote or endnote will be inserted into the text, and the cursor relocated to the footnote or endnote area at the end of the page/document. You can then type the footnote/endnote content in this area.

To delete a footnote or endnote, simply delete the appropriate marker. The contents of the footnote/endnote will be automatically deleted and the numbering of the other footnotes and endnotes is adjusted automatically.

== Defining the format of footnotes and endnotes ==

To format footnotes or endnotes, select {{Menu|Tools|Footnotes/Endnotes}}. Choose from numbering and styles settings and click '''OK'''.

[[Image:Writer-footnotes_endnotes-settings.jpg|500px|500px]]

= Checking spelling and grammar =

Writer provides a spelling checker that offers two functions:

* The AutoSpellcheck [[Image:Writer-AutoSpellcheck-icon.jpg]] checks each word as it is typed and displays a wavy red line under misspelled words. When the spelling error is corrected the red wavy line disappears.
* The spelling check [[Image:Writer-Spellcheck-icon.jpg]] performs a separate spelling check on the document when you click on the icon. The spellcheck reviews the document and opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog box if misspelled words are found. The spelling check starts at the current cursor position and advances to the end of the document. You can choose to continue the spellcheck from the beginning of the document.

Additional features of the spelling checker:

* Right click on a word with the wavy underline to open a contextual menu. You can select from suggested words and the selection will replace the misspelled word.

[[Image:Writer-Spellcheck-contextual-menu.jpg|300px]]

* Within the Spelling and Grammar dialog box you can change the dictionary language by choosing from the drop down menu in the '''Text Language''' field. Add a word to a dictionary by selecting a word, click '''Add''' and choose the dictionary to add it to.

[[Image:Writer-Spellcheck.jpg|500px|500px]]

* For more spelling check options, click '''Options''' in the Spelling and Grammar dialog box. You can choose from several options including whether to check uppercase words or words with numbers. You can also manage your dictionaries, add or delete dictionaries and add or delete words in your dictionaries.

[[Image:WRiter-Spellcheck-Options.jpg|500px|500px]]

Writer does not include a grammar checker but you can install an extension such as the LanguageTool.

= Using built-in language tools =

The document language determines the dictionary used for spellcheck, thesaurus, and hyphenation, as well as the decimal and thousands delimiter and the default currency format. Within the document you can apply a separate language to any paragraph style. This language has priority over the language for the whole document. You can also assign a language to selected pieces of text in a paragraph, by direct formatting or character style. This language has priority over the paragraph style and document language.

Writer provides some tools that allow you to mix multiple languages within the same document, or easily switch languages for your documents. This can be accomplished through:

* Language settings in Options
* Paragraph and character styles
* Using the {{Menu|Tools|Language}} menu
* Using the status bar

== Using language settings in Options ==
Using the language settings in Options allows you to set the language of the whole document.

# Select {{Menu|Tools|Options}} and go to {{Menu|Language Settings|Languages}}.
# Under '''Default languages for documents''', select the document language (this will be applied to newly created documents).
# If you want to change the language for the current document only, select the ''For the current document only'' option.

[[Image:Writer-Options-Default-Language.jpg]]

== Using paragraph and character styles ==

Selecting a language for paragraph style:
# Place the cursor within the paragraph that you want to edit.
# Right click to open the context menu and select '''Edit Paragraph Style'''.
# Inside the Paragraph Style dialog box select the Font tab.
# Select the language to use and click '''OK'''.

Selecting a language for selected text:
# Place the cursor within the text that you want to edit.
# Choose {{Menu|Format|Character}}.
# Inside the Character Style dialog box select the Font tab.
# Select the language to use and click '''OK'''.

== Using the {{Menu|Tools|Language}} menu ==
You can set the language for the document, paragraph or characters from {{Menu|Tools|Language}} on the menu bar.

'''For Selection''': Applies language to the selected text.

'''For Paragraph''': Applies language to the selected paragraph.

'''For all Text''': Applies language to the entire document.

[[Image:Writer-Tools-Language.jpg]]

== Using the status bar ==
Change the language of the paragraph or the entire document from the status bar.
# Click on the language in the status bar to pop up a menu of choices.
# Choosing '''Reset to Default Language''' will return the paragraph or entire document to the default language set in {{Menu|Tool|Options}}.

[[Image:Writer-Statusbar-language.jpg]]

=Using synonyms and the thesaurus=

To access a list of synonyms from the context menu:
#Select a word, right click to open the contextual menu.
#Under '''Synonyms''' will be a submenu of alternative words.
#Click on the word to replace it with the selected word in the document.

[[Image:Writer-context-menu-synonyms.jpg|300px]]

To access the thesaurus, which contains a more extensive list of synonyms:
#Select a word or phrase.
#Choose {{Menu|Tools|Language|Thesaurus}} or {{Key|Control|F7}} or right click and choose {{Menu|Synonyms|Thesaurus}}.
#Choose from the words in the dialog box to replace.

[[Image:Writer-thesaurus.jpg|400px]]

= Hyphenating words =
You can use hyphenation in Writer automatically (Writer uses hyphenation dictionaries) or manually (inserting conditional hyphens where necessary).

== Automatic hyphenation ==
#Open the '''Styles and Formatting''' window (click on the Styles and Formatting icon [[Image:Writer-styles-formatting-icon.jpg]] or press {{Key|Control|T}}.
#Under the Paragraph Styles page, right click on '''Default''' and select '''Modify'''.
#In the Paragraph Style dialog box, select the '''Text Flow''' tab.
#Under '''Hyphenation''', select or deselect the '''Automatically''' option, click OK to save.

[[Image:Writer-paragraph-styles-textflow.jpg|500px]]

You can set hyphenation choices through {{Menu|Tools|Options|Languages|Settings - Writing Aids}} in Options near the bottom of the box, scroll down to find the hyphenation settings.

To change the minimum number of characters for hyphenation, number of characters before a line break, or the number of characters after a line break, select the item and click the {{Button|Edit}} button.

'''Hyphenation without inquiry''' specifies that you will not be asked to manually hyphenate words that the hyphenation dictionary does not recognize. If this box is not selected, when a word is not recognized a dialog box will open where you can manually enter hyphens.

'''Hyphenate special regions''' specifies that hyphenation will be carried out in footnotes, headers and footers.

[[Image:Writer-options-writing-aids.jpg|600px]]

== Manual hyphenation ==

It is recommended to not use a normal hyphen, which remains visible at all times, even if the word is no longer at the end of a line when you add or delete text or change formatting.

Instead it is recommended to use a conditional hyphen. To insert a conditional hyphen inside a word, click where you want the hyphen to appear and press {{Key|Control|hyphen}}. The hyphen will only appear when it is at the end of the line, even if automatic hyphenation is turned off.

= Word completion =

The word completion feature in writer tries to guess the word you are typing and offers to complete the word for you. If word completion is enabled, you will see the completed word highlighted as you type. To accept the suggestion, press {{Key|Enter}}. Otherwise continue typing and the suggestion will disappear.

To enable or disabled word completion, select {{Menu|Tools|AutoCorrect Options|Word Completion|Enable Word Completion}}.

Additionally, you can customize Writer's word completion settings with the following options:

*'''Append space''': Adds space automatically after an accepted word.
*'''Show as tip''': Shows the suggested word as a tip (hovering over the word in a box) rather than completing the word as you type.
*'''Collect words''': Collects the words used in word completion when working on a document to save for later use in other documents.
*'''Accept with''': Changes the key that accepts a suggested entry.
*'''Min. word length''': Changes the length of the smallest words to be remembered.
*'''Max. entries''': Changes the maximum number of words remembered.
*'''Delete entry''': Deletes specific entries from the word completion list.

[[Image:Writer-word-completion-menu.jpg|500px]]

= Line numbering =

Line numbering adds line numbers in the margin of the document.

[[Image:Writer-line-numbering-example.jpg]]

To enable line numbering, choose {{Menu|Tools|Line Numbering}} and select the '''Show Numbering''' option, click OK.

In the Line Numbering dialog box you can choose the style, format, and position of the numbering, as well as the spacing and numbering intervals of the numbering.

[[Image:Writer-line-numbering-menu.jpg|500px]]

= Tracking changes =

To keep track of changes made in a document you may:
*Make changes to a copy of the document, and use Writer to compare the changes made between the original and the copy.
*Enable change marks, that show where you have added or deleted material or changed formatting. You can review and accept or reject each of the changes.

== Recording changes ==
#Select {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Record}}. To show or hide the display of changes select {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Show}}.
#To include a comment with the change, place the cursor in the area of the change, and choose {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Comment}}. When hovering over the change, a ''Help Tip'' will display the type of change, the author, date and time of the change. If you want a comment to also display in the tip, make sure you have ''Extended Tips'' enabled ({{Menu|Tools|Options|OpenOffice|General}} and select '''Extended tips''').
#To stop recording changes, select {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Record}} to deselect the tracking.

[[Image:Writer-tracking-changes-comment.jpg]]

== Accepting or rejecting changes ==

To accept or reject the recorded changes, you can use the right click context menu, or the Accept or Reject Changes dialog box.

The results of accepting or rejecting changes are:
*Accepting an insertion removes the marked change color from the inserted text.
*Rejecting an insertion removes the text from the document.
*Accepting a deletion removes the text from the document.
*Rejecting a deletion removes the change indicator and restores the text to the document.

'''Right click context menu'''
#Right click inside a recorded change
#In the context menu, choose '''Accept Change''' or '''Reject Change'''.

'''Accept or Reject Changes dialog box'''
#Select {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Accept or Reject}}. This will open the Accept or Reject Changes dialog box.
#Changes that have not yet been accepted or rejected are displayed. Selecting a change in the dialog box highlights the change in the document, so you can see what the editor changed.
#Choose '''Accept''' or '''Reject''' to accept or reject the selected change. You can choose '''Accept All''' or '''Reject All''' to accept or reject all changes without review.
#To show only the changes made by certain people, or changes made under other restrictions, use the ''Filter'' tab. Specify filter criteria and return to the ''List'' tab to view changes.

[[Image:Writer-tracking-changes-review.jpg|500px]]

== Merging modified documents ==
Sometimes multiple reviewers will return the edited version of a document at the same time. In this case, you may want to review all changes of the document at once. For this purpose you can merge documents in Writer.

#Open one of the modified copies.
#Choose {{Menu|Edit|Changes|Merge Document}}. Select another copy of the document to merge.
#The Accept or Reject Changes dialog box will open, showing changes by one than one reviewer. If you want to merge more documents, close the dialog box and repeat step 2.
#All recorded changes are now included in the open copy. To preserve, save this file under another name.

== Comparing documents ==
Sometimes reviewers may not track changes they make in a document. In Writer you can find the changes if you compare the documents. You must have the original document and the edited document.

#Open the edited document. Select {{Menu|Edit|Compare Document}}.
#Select the original document and choose '''Insert'''.
#Changes will be marked and the Accept or Reject Changes dialog box will be displayed. You can choose to accept or reject changes as described in the above section.

= Comments =

Writer provides another type of comments, that appear to the side of the document page, and look like "sticky notes". These comments allow authors and reviewers to exchange ideas, ask for suggestions or brainstorm during review.

To insert a comment, place the cursor in the place the comment refers to and select {{Menu|Insert|Comment}}, or press {{Key|Control|Alt|N}}. The comment will be anchored to the reference point by a dotted line, and displayed in a box to the right hand side of the page where you can type the text of the comment.

The comment box will show the author's name and time stamp indicating when the comment was created. If more than one person edits the document, each author is allocated a different comment background color.

Clicking on the menu arrow icon of the comment displays a drop-down menu where you can delete the current comment, all the comments from the same author, or all the comments in the document. Right clicking on the comment gives further options to apply basic formatting changes to the comment.

You can navigate from one comment to another using the Navigator. With the Navigator open, expand the comments section and select the comment text to move to the anchor point of the comment. You can also edit or delete comments from the Navigator by right clicking on the comment text and selecting {{Menu|Comment|Edit}} or {{Menu|Delete}}.

= Word Count =

Select text and choose {{Menu|Tools|Word Count}}. The word count dialog box will display the number of words and characters in the selection, as well as the number of words in the document.

= Changing Case =

To change the case of a selection, choose {{Menu|Format|Change case}} and choose from the following:

*''Sentence case'': only the first word is capitalized (and proper nouns)
*''lower case'': no words are capitalized (except proper nouns)
*''UPPER CASE'': all letters are capitalized
*''Capitalize Every Word'': every word is capitalized
*''tOGGLE cASE'': changes every letter to the opposite case

[[Category:Documentation]] [[Category:Documentation/Writer]]